X651de, X652de, X654de, X656de,
X656dte, X658d, X658de, X658dme,
X658dfe, X658dte, X658dtme,
X658dtfe
User's Guide
March 2012
www.lexmark.com
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2008 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, Kentucky 40550
Contents
2
Contents
Safety information.....................................................................................12
Learning about the printer.........................................................................14
Finding information about the printer....................................................................................................14
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................15
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................16
Basic functions of the scanner.................................................................................................................16
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass..............................................................................................17
Understanding the printer control panel................................................................................................18
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................19
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................21
Additional printer setup.............................................................................25
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................25
Available internal options .................................................................................................................................25
Accessing the system board to install internal options ....................................................................................26
Installing a memory card ..................................................................................................................................28
Installing a flash memory or firmware card......................................................................................................29
Installing an Internal Solutions Port..................................................................................................................32
Installing a printer hard disk .............................................................................................................................38
Installing a fax card ...........................................................................................................................................42
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................44
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................45
Printing a menu settings page ..........................................................................................................................45
Printing a network setup page..........................................................................................................................46
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................46
Installing printer software ................................................................................................................................46
Updating available options in the printer driver ..............................................................................................47
Setting up wireless printing.....................................................................................................................48
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network ...........................................................48
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)...................................................................................49
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh).................................................................................50
Installing the printer on a wired network...............................................................................................53
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port......................................56
Setting up serial printing.........................................................................................................................58
Setting up the printer to fax....................................................................................................................60
Choosing a fax connection................................................................................................................................60
Contents
3
Using an RJ11 adapter ......................................................................................................................................61
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany ................................................................................64
Connecting to a telephone ...............................................................................................................................65
Connecting to an answering machine...............................................................................................................66
Connecting to a computer with a modem ........................................................................................................68
Setting the outgoing fax name and number .....................................................................................................69
Setting the date and time .................................................................................................................................70
Turning Daylight Saving Time on ......................................................................................................................70
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................71
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type....................................................................................................71
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................71
Loading the standard or optional 250‑sheet or 550‑sheet tray..............................................................72
Loading the 2000‑sheet tray...................................................................................................................75
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................79
Loading the envelope feeder..................................................................................................................81
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................83
Linking trays ......................................................................................................................................................83
Unlinking trays ..................................................................................................................................................83
Assigning a custom paper type name ...............................................................................................................84
Changing a Custom Type <x> name..................................................................................................................84
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................................86
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................86
Paper characteristics.........................................................................................................................................86
Unacceptable paper..........................................................................................................................................87
Selecting paper .................................................................................................................................................87
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead ......................................................................................................87
Using recycled paper and other office papers ..................................................................................................88
Storing paper ....................................................................................................................................................88
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................89
Paper sizes supported by the printer................................................................................................................89
Paper types and weights supported by the printer ..........................................................................................90
Paper types and weights supported by the finisher .........................................................................................91
Copying......................................................................................................93
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................93
Making a quick copy .........................................................................................................................................93
Copying using the ADF ......................................................................................................................................93
Copying using the scanner glass .......................................................................................................................94
Copying photos........................................................................................................................................94
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................94
Contents
4
Making transparencies .....................................................................................................................................94
Copying to letterhead .......................................................................................................................................95
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................95
Copying from one size to another ....................................................................................................................95
Making copies using paper from a selected tray ..............................................................................................96
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes .....................................................................................96
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)...............................................................................................97
Reducing or enlarging copies............................................................................................................................97
Adjusting copy quality ......................................................................................................................................98
Collating copies.................................................................................................................................................98
Placing separator sheets between copies.........................................................................................................99
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet .....................................................................................................99
Creating a custom job (job build)....................................................................................................................100
Job interrupt..........................................................................................................................................101
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................101
Placing the date and time at the top of each page.........................................................................................101
Placing an overlay message on each page ......................................................................................................101
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................102
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF .................................................................................102
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass ................................................................102
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed ................................................................................102
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................102
Copy from .......................................................................................................................................................102
Copy to............................................................................................................................................................103
Scale................................................................................................................................................................103
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................103
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................103
Sides (Duplex) .................................................................................................................................................103
Collate.............................................................................................................................................................104
Options ...........................................................................................................................................................104
Improving copy quality..........................................................................................................................105
E-mailing..................................................................................................106
Getting ready to e-mail.........................................................................................................................106
Setting up the e-mail function ........................................................................................................................106
Configuring the e‑mail settings.......................................................................................................................107
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................107
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.......................................................................107
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen .......................................................................................107
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................108
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen ......................................................................................................108
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number ................................................................................................... 108
Sending an e-mail using the address book .....................................................................................................108
Contents
5
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................109
Adding e-mail subject and message information ...........................................................................................109
Changing the output file type .........................................................................................................................109
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................110
Understanding e-mail options...............................................................................................................110
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................110
Sides (Duplex) .................................................................................................................................................110
Orientation .....................................................................................................................................................110
Binding ............................................................................................................................................................110
E-mail Subject .................................................................................................................................................110
E-mail File Name .............................................................................................................................................111
E-mail Message ...............................................................................................................................................111
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................................111
Send As ...........................................................................................................................................................111
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................111
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................111
Faxing......................................................................................................113
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................113
Sending a fax using the printer control panel.................................................................................................113
Sending a fax using the computer ..................................................................................................................114
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................114
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server...........................................................114
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen ...........................................................................115
Using shortcuts and the address book..................................................................................................115
Using fax shortcuts .........................................................................................................................................115
Using the address book ..................................................................................................................................115
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................116
Changing the fax resolution ............................................................................................................................116
Making a fax lighter or darker ........................................................................................................................116
Sending a fax at a scheduled time ..................................................................................................................117
Viewing a fax log .............................................................................................................................................117
Blocking junk faxes..........................................................................................................................................117
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................118
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning.....................................................................118
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory...............................................118
Understanding fax options....................................................................................................................118
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................118
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................118
Sides (Duplex) .................................................................................................................................................119
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................................119
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................119
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................119
Contents
6
Improving fax quality.............................................................................................................................120
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................120
Holding faxes ..................................................................................................................................................120
Forwarding a fax .............................................................................................................................................121
Scanning to an FTP address......................................................................122
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................122
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad ................................................................................................122
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number ....................................................................................123
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book ......................................................................................123
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................123
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ...........................................................................123
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen ...........................................................................................124
Understanding FTP options...................................................................................................................124
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................124
Sides (Duplex) .................................................................................................................................................124
Orientation .....................................................................................................................................................124
Binding ............................................................................................................................................................124
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................................125
Send As ...........................................................................................................................................................125
Content ...........................................................................................................................................................125
Advanced Options...........................................................................................................................................125
Improving FTP quality............................................................................................................................126
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................................127
Scanning to a computer........................................................................................................................127
Scanning to a flash drive........................................................................................................................128
Understanding scan profile options......................................................................................................128
Quick Setup.....................................................................................................................................................128
Format Type....................................................................................................................................................129
Compression ...................................................................................................................................................129
Default Content ..............................................................................................................................................129
Color ...............................................................................................................................................................129
Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................129
Orientation .....................................................................................................................................................129
Sides (Duplex) .................................................................................................................................................129
Darkness .........................................................................................................................................................130
Resolution .......................................................................................................................................................130
Advanced Imaging...........................................................................................................................................130
Improving scan quality..........................................................................................................................130
Contents
7
Printing....................................................................................................131
Printing a document..............................................................................................................................131
Printing on specialty media...................................................................................................................131
Tips on using letterhead .................................................................................................................................131
Tips on using transparencies ..........................................................................................................................132
Tips on using envelopes..................................................................................................................................132
Tips on using labels .........................................................................................................................................133
Tips on using card stock..................................................................................................................................133
Printing confidential and other held jobs..............................................................................................134
Holding jobs in the printer ..............................................................................................................................134
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows...............................................................................135
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer .........................................................135
Printing from a flash drive.....................................................................................................................136
Printing information pages....................................................................................................................137
Printing a directory list....................................................................................................................................137
Printing the print quality test pages ...............................................................................................................137
Canceling a print job..............................................................................................................................137
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel......................................................................................137
Canceling a print job from the computer .......................................................................................................138
Clearing jams............................................................................................140
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................140
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................141
200 and 201 paper jams........................................................................................................................141
202 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................143
230–239 paper jams..............................................................................................................................144
240–249 paper jams..............................................................................................................................145
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................146
260 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................147
270–279 paper jams..............................................................................................................................147
280–282 paper jams..............................................................................................................................147
283 staple jams.....................................................................................................................................148
290–294 paper jams..............................................................................................................................150
Understanding printer menus...................................................................152
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................152
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................153
Default Source menu ......................................................................................................................................153
Paper Size/Type menu ....................................................................................................................................153
Contents
8
Configure MP menu........................................................................................................................................156
Envelope Enhance...........................................................................................................................................157
Substitute Size menu ......................................................................................................................................157
Paper Texture menu .......................................................................................................................................157
Paper Weight menu ........................................................................................................................................159
Paper Loading menu .......................................................................................................................................161
Custom Types menu .......................................................................................................................................162
Custom Names menu .....................................................................................................................................162
Custom Scan Sizes menu ................................................................................................................................163
Custom Bin Names menu ...............................................................................................................................163
Universal Setup menu.....................................................................................................................................163
Bin Setup menu...............................................................................................................................................164
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................165
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................167
Active NIC menu .............................................................................................................................................167
Standard Network or Network <x> menus .....................................................................................................167
SMTP Setup menu ..........................................................................................................................................169
Network Reports menu ..................................................................................................................................170
Network Card menu........................................................................................................................................170
TCP/IP menu ...................................................................................................................................................171
IPv6 menu .......................................................................................................................................................172
Wireless menu ................................................................................................................................................172
AppleTalk menu ..............................................................................................................................................173
NetWare menu ...............................................................................................................................................173
LexLink menu ..................................................................................................................................................174
Standard USB menu ........................................................................................................................................175
Parallel <x> menu ...........................................................................................................................................176
Serial <x> menu ..............................................................................................................................................178
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................181
Miscellaneous menu.......................................................................................................................................181
Confidential Print menu..................................................................................................................................181
Disk Wiping menu...........................................................................................................................................182
Security Audit Log menu.................................................................................................................................183
Set Date/Time menu.......................................................................................................................................184
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................185
General Settings menu ...................................................................................................................................185
Copy Settings menu ........................................................................................................................................192
Fax Settings menu...........................................................................................................................................197
E‑mail Settings menu ......................................................................................................................................206
FTP Settings menu ..........................................................................................................................................211
Flash Drive menu ............................................................................................................................................214
Print Settings...................................................................................................................................................219
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................231
Contents
9
Understanding printer messages..............................................................232
List of status and error messages..........................................................................................................232
Maintaining the printer............................................................................251
Cleaning the exterior of the printer......................................................................................................251
Cleaning the scanner glass....................................................................................................................251
Adjusting scanner registration..............................................................................................................252
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................253
Conserving supplies...............................................................................................................................254
Checking the status of supplies.............................................................................................................254
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel .....................................................................254
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer ............................................................................254
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................255
Ordering print cartridges ................................................................................................................................255
Ordering a maintenance kit ............................................................................................................................256
Ordering a fuser ..............................................................................................................................................256
Ordering an ADF maintenance kit...................................................................................................................257
Ordering a transfer roller................................................................................................................................257
Ordering charge rolls ......................................................................................................................................257
Ordering pick rollers .......................................................................................................................................257
Ordering ADF replacement parts....................................................................................................................257
Ordering staple cartridges ..............................................................................................................................258
Recycling Lexmark products..................................................................................................................258
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................258
Before moving the printer ..............................................................................................................................258
Moving the printer to another location..........................................................................................................259
Setting the printer up in a new location .........................................................................................................259
Shipping the printer ........................................................................................................................................259
Administrative support............................................................................260
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................260
Using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................................260
Checking the device status....................................................................................................................260
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................260
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................261
Adjusting the brightness of the display.................................................................................................261
Adjusting Power Saver..........................................................................................................................262
Restoring the factory default settings...................................................................................................262
Contents
10
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................264
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................264
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds..........................................................264
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................264
Multiple‑language PDFs do not print..............................................................................................................264
Error message about reading USB drive appears ...........................................................................................264
Jobs do not print .............................................................................................................................................265
Confidential and other held jobs do not print ................................................................................................265
Job takes longer than expected to print .........................................................................................................266
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper..................................................................................266
Incorrect characters print ...............................................................................................................................266
Tray linking does not work..............................................................................................................................267
Large jobs do not collate.................................................................................................................................267
Unexpected page breaks occur.......................................................................................................................267
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................268
Copier does not respond ................................................................................................................................268
Scanner unit does not close............................................................................................................................268
Poor copy quality ............................................................................................................................................268
Partial document or photo copies ..................................................................................................................270
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................270
Checking an unresponsive scanner.................................................................................................................270
Scan was not successful ..................................................................................................................................270
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer ..........................................................................................271
Poor scanned image quality............................................................................................................................271
Partial document or photo scans....................................................................................................................271
Cannot scan from a computer ........................................................................................................................272
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................272
Caller ID is not shown .....................................................................................................................................272
Cannot send or receive a fax ..........................................................................................................................272
Can send but not receive faxes.......................................................................................................................274
Can receive but not send faxes.......................................................................................................................274
Received fax has poor print quality ................................................................................................................275
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................276
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed ......................................................................276
Paper trays......................................................................................................................................................276
2000‑sheet tray...............................................................................................................................................277
Envelope feeder..............................................................................................................................................277
Output options................................................................................................................................................277
Flash memory card .........................................................................................................................................278
Hard disk with adapter ...................................................................................................................................278
Internal Solutions Port....................................................................................................................................278
Memory card ..................................................................................................................................................278
Contents
11
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................278
Paper frequently jams.....................................................................................................................................278
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ...........................................................................................279
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam ..........................................................................279
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................279
Isolating print quality problems......................................................................................................................279
Blank pages .....................................................................................................................................................280
Characters have jagged or uneven edges .......................................................................................................280
Clipped images................................................................................................................................................281
Ghost images ..................................................................................................................................................281
Gray background.............................................................................................................................................282
Incorrect margins............................................................................................................................................282
Paper curl........................................................................................................................................................283
Print irregularities ...........................................................................................................................................283
Repeating defects ...........................................................................................................................................284
Skewed print...................................................................................................................................................284
Solid black or white streaks ............................................................................................................................285
Print is too light...............................................................................................................................................285
Print is too dark ..............................................................................................................................................286
Solid color pages .............................................................................................................................................287
Streaked vertical lines.....................................................................................................................................288
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page .................................................................................288
Toner rubs off .................................................................................................................................................289
Toner specks ...................................................................................................................................................289
Transparency print quality is poor..................................................................................................................290
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................290
Check the network connections .....................................................................................................................290
Check the network settings ............................................................................................................................290
Contacting Customer Support...............................................................................................................290
Notices.....................................................................................................291
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................291
Industry Canada notices........................................................................................................................294
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................301
Index........................................................................................................308
Safety information
12
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If the power cord is misused, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of misuse. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Safety information
13
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Learning about the printer
14
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
Setup information
Description
Where to find
The Setup information gives you instructions for setting up You can find the Setup information on the side of the printer
the printer. Follow the set of instructions for local, network, box or on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
or wireless, depending on what you need.
Help
Description
Where to find
The Help gives you instructions for using the
software.
While in any Lexmark software program, click Help, Tips > Help, or Help >
Help Topics.
Customer support
Description
Where to find (North America)
Where to find (rest of world)
Telephone support
Call us at
Telephone numbers and support hours
vary by country or region.
Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Select a country or region, and then select
the Customer Support link.
• US: 1‑800‑332‑4120
Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–11:00 PM
ET)
Saturday (Noon–6:00 PM ET)
• Canada: 1‑800‑539‑6275
Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–11:00 PM
ET)
Saturday (Noon–6:00 PM ET)
• Mexico: 001‑888‑377‑0063
Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–8:00 PM ET)
Note: Telephone numbers and support
times may change without notice. For the
most recent telephone numbers available,
see the printed warranty statement that
came with your printer.
Note: For additional information about
contacting Lexmark, see the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
Learning about the printer
15
Description
Where to find (North America)
Where to find (rest of world)
E-mail support
For e-mail support, visit our Web site:
www.lexmark.com.
1 Click SUPPORT.
E‑mail support varies by country or region,
and may not be available in some instances.
2
3
4
5
Click Technical Support.
Select your printer type.
Select your printer model.
From the Support Tools section, click
e-Mail Support.
Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Select a country or region, and then select
the Customer Support link.
Note: For additional information about
contacting Lexmark, see the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
6 Complete the form, and then click
Submit Request.
Printer configurations
Note: Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model.
Basic models
1
2
7
3
2
4
5
6
1
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
2
Printer control panel
3
Standard exit bin
4
Multipurpose feeder
5
550-sheet tray (Tray 1)
6
550-sheet tray (Tray 2)
7
Optional output bin
Learning about the printer
16
Selecting a location for the printer
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
Right Side 20 cm (8 in.)
2
Left Side
31 cm (12 in.)
3
Front
51 cm (20 in.)
4
Rear
20 cm (8 in.)
5
Top
31 cm (12 in.)
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
•
•
•
•
•
Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Learning about the printer
17
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Scanner glass
A
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings or lightweight carbonless forms).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. When using the ADF:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
Scan sizes from 76.2 x 139.4 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 in.) thick.
Learning about the printer
18
Understanding the printer control panel
1
2
1
4
GHI
7
PQRS
*
2
3
ABC
DEF
5
6
JKL
8
MNO
9
TUV
WXYZ
0
#
3
4
5
8
Item
7
6
Description
1
Display
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.
2
Keypad
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.
1
4
GHI
7
PQRS
*
3
2
ABC
5
JKL
8
3
DEF
6
MNO
9
TUV
WXYZ
0
#
Dial Pause
• Press
to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a
Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).
• From the home screen, press
to redial a fax number.
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the
Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing
4
Back
causes an error beep.
In the Copy menu, press
to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count. The
default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing
numerous times.
to delete the right-most digit of a number entered
In the Fax Destination List, press
to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line is
manually. You can also press
causes the cursor to move up one line.
deleted, another press of
to delete the character to the left of the cursor. If the
In the E-mail Destination List, press
character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
5
Home
Press
to return to the home screen.
Learning about the printer
Item
19
Description
6
Start
7
Indicator light
• Press
to initiate the current job indicated on the display.
• From the home screen, press to start a copy job with the default settings.
• If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.
Indicates the printer status:
•
•
•
•
8
Stop
Off—The power is off.
Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.
Stops all printer activity
A list of options is offered once Stopped appears on the display.
Understanding the home screen
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows the following basic screen which
is referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning;
to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.
1
2
8
Ready
Touch any button to begin.
7
Display item
1
Copy
6
5
4
3
Description
Opens the Copy menus
Note: From the home screen, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a number on
the keypad.
2
E-mail
Opens the E-mail menus
3
Menus
Opens the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
4
FTP
Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus
Note: This function must be set up by your system support person. Once it is set up, it
appears as a display item.
Learning about the printer
Display item
5
Status message bar
20
Description
• Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.
• Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the printer can
continue processing, such as Close door or Insert print cartridge.
6
Status/Supplies
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring intervention.
Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the message, including how
to clear it.
7
Tips
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitive Help feature within the display touch
screens.
8
Fax
Opens the Fax menus
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Display item
Function
Release Held Faxes
If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold
time previously set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this button.
Search Held Jobs
Searches on any of the following items and returns search results:
•
•
•
•
•
User names for held or confidential print jobs
Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
Profile names
Bookmark container or job names
USB container or job names for supported extensions only
Held Jobs
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs
Lock Device
This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and
Device Lockout Personal Identification Number (PIN) has been set.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct
PIN locks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
Unlock Device
This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked. The
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while it
appears.
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the correct
PIN unlocks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard buttons).
Learning about the printer
21
Display item
Function
Cancel Jobs
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:
•
•
•
•
•
Print job
Copy job
Fax profile
FTP
E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which
you can touch to access information about the job. If more than three
jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll
through the jobs.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.
Sample touch screen
Button
Function
Home
Returns to the home screen
Scroll down
Opens a drop‑down list
Learning about the printer
Button
22
Function
Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order
Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order
Left arrow
Scrolls left
Right arrow
Scrolls right
Submit
Saves a value as the new user default setting
Back
Navigates back to the previous screen
Other touch-screen buttons
Button
Function
Down arrow
Moves down to the next screen
Up arrow
Moves up to the next screen
Unselected radio button
This is an unselected radio button. The radio button is gray to show it is unselected.
Learning about the printer
23
Button
Function
Selected radio button
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is selected.
Cancel Jobs
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print,
Fax, and Network.
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:
•
•
•
•
•
Print job
Copy job
Fax profile
FTP
E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three
jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch to access
information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow
appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Continue
Cancel
Select
Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or after clearing
a paper jam.
• Cancels an action or a selection
• Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen
Selects a menu or menu item
Learning about the printer
24
Features
Feature
Description
Menu trail line:
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature acts as a
trail, showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the exact location
within the menus.
Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch
an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies
is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the user
default setting.
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message occurs which closes a function, such as copy or fax, then
a solid red dot appears over the function button on the home screen. This indicates
that an attendance message exists.
Additional printer setup
25
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this
section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– Printer memory
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code and Forms
– IPDS and SCS/TNe
– PrintCryptionTM
– PRESCRIBE
• Printer hard disk
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– RS-232-C Serial ISP
– Parallel 1284-B ISP
– MarkNetTM N8150802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
• MarkNet N8110 V-34 Fax Card
Additional printer setup
26
Accessing the system board to install internal options
Note: This operation requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1 Open the system board door.
2 Loosen the screw(s) on the system board cover.
Additional printer setup
27
3 Remove the system board cover.
4 Use the illustration below to locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1
2
4
3
1
Firmware and flash memory card connectors
2
Memory card connector
3
Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
4
Fax card connector
Additional printer setup
28
Installing a memory card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory card:
1 Access the system board.
2
3
1
2 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Open the memory card connector latches.
Additional printer setup
29
4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector.
1
2
1
Notches
2
Ridges
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place.
6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
2
1
3
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
Additional printer setup
30
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2
3
1
2 Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
1
Plastic pins
2
Metal pins
Additional printer setup
31
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Notes:
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
2
1
3
Additional printer setup
32
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP). Install an ISP for additional connectivity
options.
Note: This operation requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2
3
1
2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must first be removed. To
remove the hard disk:
Additional printer setup
33
a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch
before pulling the cable out.
b Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
Additional printer setup
34
d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then
remove the bracket. Set the printer hard disk aside.
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
2
1
Additional printer setup
35
5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board, and then press downward until the tee snaps
into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system
board.
6 Install the ISP onto the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then approach the plastic tee so that any
overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.
Additional printer setup
36
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.
8 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten the thumbscrew
at this time.
Additional printer setup
37
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.
10 Tighten the long thumbscrew.
Note: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.
11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
12 If a printer hard disk was previously installed, then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP. For more information,
see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 38.
Additional printer setup
38
13 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
2
1
3
Installing a printer hard disk
The optional printer hard disk can be installed with or without a Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This operation requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2
3
1
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.
Additional printer setup
39
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws, remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk
mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket.
b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP, and then press downward on the printer
hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
Additional printer setup
40
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board:
a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board, and then press downward on
the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.
Additional printer setup
41
b Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.
4 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
2
1
3
Additional printer setup
42
Installing a fax card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
2
3
1
2 Unpack the fax card.
3 Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening.
2
1
Additional printer setup
4 Insert the fax card and attach the two provided screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket.
43
Additional printer setup
44
5 Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.
2
1
3
Attaching cables
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Additional printer setup
45
1
1
USB port
2
Ethernet port
2
Verifying printer setup
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following: .
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option and install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing
configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings page lists all the factory
default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings as
user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,
and save it. To restore the factory default settings, see “Restoring the factory default settings” on page 262.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
Additional printer setup
46
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.
The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch Network Setup Page.
The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.
5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”
If Status is “Not Connected,” the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult
a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing printer software
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically
installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:
For Windows users
1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the main installation dialog, click Install.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Close all open software applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.
4 Double-click the Install icon.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen.
Additional printer setup
47
Using the World Wide Web
1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
2 From the Drivers & Downloads menu, click Driver Finder.
3 Select your printer, and then select your operating system.
4 Download the driver and install the printer software.
Updating available options in the printer driver
Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer
driver to make them available for print jobs.
For Windows users
1 Do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
a
b
c
d
Click
.
Click Control Panel.
Click Hardware and Sound.
Click Printers.
In Windows XP
a Click Start.
b Click Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000
a Click Start.
b Click Settings > Printers.
2 Select the printer.
3 Right‑click the printer, and then select Properties.
4 Click the Install Options tab.
5 Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Select the printer, and then click Options & Supplies.
Additional printer setup
48
4 Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.
5 Click OK.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double‑click Utilities, and then double‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
4 From the pop‑up menu, choose Installable Options.
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.
Setting up wireless printing
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure
which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently
in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.
or
– WPA or WPA2 passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:
•
•
•
•
Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X username and password
Certificates
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Additional printer setup
49
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1 Connect the power cable, and then turn the printer on.
1
2
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 Click Install.
4 Click Agree.
5 Click Suggested.
Additional printer setup
50
6 Click Wireless Network Attach.
7 Connect the cables in the following order:
a Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable
so you can print wirelessly.
b If your printer has faxing capabilities, then connect the telephone cable.
8 Follow the on‑screen instructions to complete the software installation.
9 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 2 through 6 and step 8
for each computer.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Prepare to configure the printer
1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that came with the printer. Write the last six digits of the MAC address
in the space provided below:
MAC address: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
2 If your printer has faxing capabilities, then connect the telephone cable.
3 Connect the power cable, and then turn the power on.
Additional printer setup
51
1
2
Enter the printer information
1 Access the AirPort options.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double‑click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.
2 From the Network pop‑up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x’s are the last six digits of the MAC address
located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open the Safari browser.
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.
5 Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendevous, and then double‑click the printer name.
6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information is
stored.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.
3 Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.
Additional printer setup
52
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double‑click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.
7 From the Network pop‑up menu, select your wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and
create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
1 Install a PPD file on the computer:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
b Double-click the installer package for the printer.
c From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
f Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
g From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
h Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary software is installed on the computer.
i Click Close when installation is complete.
2 Add the printer:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Select the printer from the list.
5 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double‑click Utilities.
3 Locate and double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
Additional printer setup
53
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double‑click Utilities.
3 Locate and double‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop‑up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.
Installing the printer on a wired network
Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber
optic network connections.
Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:
• You have completed the initial setup of the printer.
• The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.
For Windows users
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
a Click
.
b In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
Additional printer setup
54
In Windows XP and earlier
a Click Start.
b Click Run.
c Type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
2 Click Install Printer and Software.
3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
4 Select Suggested, and then click Next.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select
Custom and follow the on‑screen instructions.
5 Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.
6 Select the printer manufacturer from the list.
7 Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.
8 Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.
Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, click Add Port and follow the
on‑screen instructions.
9 Follow the on‑screen instructions to complete the installation.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Print the network setup page from the printer. For information on printing a network setup page, see “Printing a
network setup page” on page 46.
3 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
4 Install the drivers and add the printer.
a Install a PPD file on the computer:
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
2 Double-click the installer package for the printer.
3 From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
4 Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
5 Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the
6
7
8
9
agreement.
Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.
Click Close when installation is complete.
b Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
Additional printer setup
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Select the printer from the list.
5 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double‑click Utilities.
3 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, click Add.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double‑click Utilities.
3 Double‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, click Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop‑up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.
Note: If the printer doesn't show up in the list, you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact your
system support person for assistance.
55
Additional printer setup
56
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal
Solutions Port
When a new network Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on
computers that access the printer must be updated because the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers
that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network.
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address that will stay the same, then you do not need to make any changes to the
computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same, instead of by
IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the
wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection
remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. This
can be fixed by disconnecting the wired connection, turning the printer off, and then turning the printer back on
again.
For Windows users
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2 Do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
a Click
.
b Click Control Panel.
c Under Hardware and Sound, click Printer.
In Windows XP
a Click Start.
b Click Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000
a Click Start.
b Click Settings > Printers.
3 Locate the printer that has changed.
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4 Right‑click the printer.
5 Click Properties.
6 Click the Ports tab.
7 Locate the port in the list, and then select it.
8 Click Configure Port.
Additional printer setup
57
9 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field. You can find the new IP address on the network
setup page you printed in step 1.
10 Click OK, and then click Close.
For Mac users
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.
2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3 Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Print & Fax.
c Click +.
d Select the printer from the list.
e Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double‑click Utilities.
c Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
d From the Printer List, click Add.
e Select the printer from the list.
f Click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Print & Fax.
c Click +.
d Click AppleTalk.
e Select the printer from the list.
f Click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.
b Double‑click Utilities.
c Double‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
d From the Printer List, click Add.
e Choose the Default Browser tab.
f Click More Printers.
g From the first pop‑up menu, choose AppleTalk.
h From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
Additional printer setup
58
i Select the printer from the list.
j Click Add.
Setting up serial printing
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing,
it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface
with a better transfer rate is not available.
After installing the serial port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate. Make
sure you have connected the serial cable to the serial port on your printer.
1 Set the parameters in the printer:
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b Locate the submenu with serial port settings.
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d Save the new settings.
e Print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD. It launches automatically.
If the CD does not launch automatically, do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
1 Click
.
2 In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
In Windows XP and earlier
1 Click Start.
2 Click Run.
3 Type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Click Install Printer and Software.
Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement.
Click Custom.
Make sure Select Components is selected, and then click Next.
Make sure Local is selected, and then click Next.
Select the manufacturer of the printer from the menu.
Select the printer model from the menu, and then click Add Printer.
Click the + beside the printer model under Select Components.
Make sure the correct port is available under Select Components. This is the port where the serial cable attaches
to the computer. If the correct port is not available, select the port under the Select Port menu, and then click
Add Port.
k Make any configuration changes necessary in the Add a New Port window. Click Add Port to finish adding the
port.
Additional printer setup
59
l Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked.
m Select any other optional software you want to install, and then click Next.
n Click Finish to complete the printer software installation.
3 Set the COM port parameters:
After the printer driver is installed, you must set the serial parameters in the communications (COM) port assigned
to the printer driver.
The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a Open the Device Manager. Do one of the following:
In Windows Vista
1
2
3
4
5
Click
.
Click Control Panel.
Click System and Maintenance.
Click System.
Click Device Manager.
In Windows XP
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start.
Click Control Panel.
Click Performance and Maintenance.
Click System.
From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.
In Windows 2000
1
2
3
4
b
c
d
e
Click Start.
Click Settings > Control Panel.
Click System.
From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.
Click + to expand the list of available ports.
Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
Click Properties.
On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.
Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier.
f Click OK, and then close all the windows.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation. When a test page prints successfully, printer setup is complete.
Additional printer setup
60
Setting up the printer to fax
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Choosing a fax connection
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem.
Note: The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall jack. Other devices (such
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the
setup steps. If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is
required.
You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to a telephone line to send and
receive faxes.
You can connect the printer to other equipment. See the following table to determine the best way to set up the printer.
Equipment
• The printer
• A telephone cord
• The printer
• A telephone
• Two telephone cords
•
•
•
•
The printer
•
•
•
•
The printer
Benefits
Send and receive faxes without using a computer.
• Use the fax line as a normal telephone line.
• Send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.
A telephone
An answering machine
Three telephone cords
A telephone
A computer modem
Three telephone cords
Send faxes using the computer or the printer.
Additional printer setup
61
Using an RJ11 adapter
Country/region
•
•
•
•
•
United Kingdom
Ireland
Finland
Norway
Denmark
•
•
•
•
•
Italy
Sweden
Netherlands
France
Portugal
To connect your printer to an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment, use the
telephone line adapter included in the box with the printer in some countries or regions.
Note: If you have DSL, do not connect the printer using a splitter because the fax feature may not work correctly.
1 Connect the adapter to the telephone cord that came with the printer.
Note: The UK adapter is shown. Your adapter may look different, but it will fit the telephone outlet used in your
location.
2 Connect the telephone line of your chosen telecommunications equipment to the left outlet of the adapter.
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, follow these steps to connect the
equipment:
1 Remove the plug from the EXT port
on the back of the printer.
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country‑ or region‑specific equipment you connect to the printer by way
of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.
Additional printer setup
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port
62
on the back of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Country/region
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Saudi Arabia
United Arab Emirates
Egypt
Bulgaria
Czech Republic
Belgium
Australia
South Africa
Greece
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Israel
Hungary
Poland
Romania
Russia
Slovenia
Spain
Turkey
Additional printer setup
63
To connect a telephone, an answering machine, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer:
1 Remove the plug from the back of the printer.
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port
on the back of the printer.
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country‑ or region‑specific equipment that you connect to the printer by way
of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.
Country/region
• Germany
• Austria
• Switzerland
Additional printer setup
There is a plug installed in the EXT port
64
of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the printer.
Note: Do not remove the plug. If you remove it, other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones
or answering machines) may not work.
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany
Connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Note: In Germany (and some other countries), the printer ships with a special RJ‑11 plug in the EXT port. Do not
remove the RJ‑11 plug. It is required for both the fax and telephone to work properly.
1 Make sure you have a telephone cord (provided with the product) and a telephone wall jack.
2 Connect one end of the telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer.
3 Connect the other end of the telephone cord into the N slot of an active telephone wall jack.
Additional printer setup
65
4 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, connect a second telephone line
(not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active telephone wall jack.
5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, connect a second
telephone line (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a telephone
Connect a telephone to the printer to use the fax line as a normal telephone line. Then set up the printer wherever
your telephone is located to make copies or to send and receive faxes without using a computer.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Make sure you have the following:
• A telephone
• Two telephone cords
• A telephone wall jack
Additional printer setup
2 Connect one telephone cord to the LINE port
66
of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port
of the printer.
4 Connect the other telephone cord to a telephone, and then plug it into the EXT port
of the printer.
Connecting to an answering machine
Connect an answering machine to the printer to receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Make sure you have the following:
• A telephone
• An answering machine
• Three telephone cords
• A telephone wall jack
Additional printer setup
2 Connect one telephone cord into the LINE port
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port
67
of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.
of the printer.
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the answering machine.
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the answering machine to the EXT port
of the printer.
Additional printer setup
68
Connecting to a computer with a modem
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.
1 Make sure you have the following:
• A telephone
• A computer with a modem
• Three telephone cords
• A telephone wall jack
2 Connect a telephone cord into the LINE
port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port
of the printer.
Additional printer setup
69
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the computer modem.
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the computer modem to the EXT port
of the printer.
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7 Click Submit.
Additional printer setup
70
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time. To set the date and time:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Links & Index.
3 Click Set Date and Time.
4 Click inside the Manually Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.
5 Click Submit.
Turning Daylight Saving Time on
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time (DST):
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Links & Index.
3 Click Set Date and Time.
4 Select Automatically Observe DST.
5 Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
71
Loading paper and specialty media
This section explains how to load the 250-, 500-, and 2000-sheet trays, and the multipurpose feeder. It also includes
information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type
The Paper Size setting is determined by the position of the paper guides in the tray for all trays except the multipurpose
feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually. The factory default Paper Type setting
is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.
5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears.
6 Touch Submit.
7 Touch
to return to the home screen.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
• Units of measure (millimeters or inches)
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Specify a unit of measurement
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setup appears, and then touch Universal Setup.
5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure.
6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
7 Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height.
Loading paper and specialty media
72
8 Touch Submit to save your selection.
Submitting Selection appears, followed by the Paper menu.
9 Touch
to return to the home screen.
Loading the standard or optional 250‑sheet or 550‑sheet tray
Although the 250-sheet tray and the 550-sheet tray are different in appearance, they require the same process for
loading paper. Use these instructions to load paper in either tray:
1 Pull the tray out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
2 Squeeze the width guide tab inward as shown, and move the width guide to the correct position for the paper size
being loaded.
Loading paper and specialty media
73
3 Unlock the length guide, squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown, and slide the guide to the correct position
for the paper size being loaded.
2
1
3
Notes:
• Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
• For standard paper sizes, lock the length guide.
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
5 Load the paper stack:
• Print side facedown for single‑sided printing
• Print side faceup for duplex printing
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmartTM II Finisher is installed.
Loading paper and specialty media
With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
ABC
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
74
ABC
Single‑sided printing
Single‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Duplex (two‑sided) printing
Duplex (two‑sided) printing
Note: Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading
paper. Do not overload the tray.
6 If necessary, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and lock the length guide for the paper
sizes indicated on the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
7 Insert the tray.
8 If a different type of paper was loaded than the type previously loaded in the tray, then change the Paper Type
setting for the tray from the printer control panel.
Loading the 2000‑sheet tray
1 Pull the tray out.
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.
75
Loading paper and specialty media
76
3 Unlock the length guide.
4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide, slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size being loaded, and then lock the guide.
Loading paper and specialty media
77
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
6 Load the paper stack:
• Print side facedown for single‑sided printing
• Print side faceup for duplex printing
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart II Finisher is installed.
ABC
Single‑sided printing
With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
ABC
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
Single‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
78
With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
ABC
ABC
Duplex (two‑sided) printing
Duplex (two‑sided) printing
Note: Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading
paper. Do not overload the tray.
7 Insert the tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
79
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2 Pull out the extension until it is fully extended.
3 Slide the width guide to the far right.
4 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease
them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Loading paper and specialty media
80
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies*
* Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
5 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
ABC
Single‑sided printing
With an optional StapleSmart Finisher
ABC
Without an optional StapleSmart Finisher
Single‑sided printing
Loading paper and specialty media
With an optional StapleSmart Finisher
ABC
Without an optional StapleSmart Finisher
81
ABC
Duplex (two‑sided) printing
Duplex (two‑sided) printing
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.
Do not load or close a tray while a job is printing.
Load only one size and type of media at a time.
Load envelopes with the flap side up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the
multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
7 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
Loading the envelope feeder
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are loading:
• Short envelopes—Fully close the envelope support.
• Medium‑length envelopes—Extend the envelope support to the middle position.
• Long envelopes—Fully open the envelope support.
Loading paper and specialty media
82
2 Lift the envelope weight back toward the printer.
3 Slide the width guide to the right.
4 Prepare the envelopes for loading.
Flex the envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5 Load the stack of envelopes flap side down.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Loading paper and specialty media
83
Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.
6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.
7 Lower the envelope weight to touch the paper stack.
8 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except
the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper sizes. The
multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from
the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP
Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unlinking trays
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.
Loading paper and specialty media
84
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:
• Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.
• Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically. Paper Size settings for the
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper
loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.
5 Touch the paper type arrows for the desired tray until the correct custom type appears.
6 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type.
7 Touch Submit.
Changing a Custom Type <x> name
You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM to define a name other than Custom Type <x> for each of the
custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display the new name
instead of Custom Type <x>.
To change a Custom Type <x> name from the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click Paper Menu.
4 Click Custom Names.
5 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size/Type
menus.
6 Click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media
7 Click Custom Types.
Custom Types appears, followed by your custom name.
8 Select a Paper Type setting from the list next to your custom name.
9 Click Submit.
85
Paper and specialty media guidelines
86
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the
paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Note: For detailed information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark
Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier
paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is
too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield
points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
87
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For paper heavier than 176 g/m2, grain
short is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
For detailed information on paper with recycled fiber content, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on
page 88.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•
•
•
•
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the
paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
88
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating
that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement
can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much
rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very
well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between
40 and 60%.
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
89
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, configure a Universal Paper Size.
For information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com/publications.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Paper size
Dimensions
250‑ or
550‑sheet trays
(standard or
optional)
Optional
2000‑sheet tray
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
A61,2
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X
Oficio1
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
X
Folio1
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
X
Statement1
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex unit
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size sensing
is turned off.
2
Only the standard exit bin supports this size.
3This size
4
setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.
To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 148 mm (5.8 in) and 216 mm (8.5 in); Universal length must
be between 182 mm (7.2 in) and 356 mm (14 in).
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper size
Dimensions
Universal3,4
138 x 210 mm
(5.5 x 8.3 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
70 x 127 mm
(2.8 x 5 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
90
250‑ or
550‑sheet trays
(standard or
optional)
X
Optional
2000‑sheet tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex unit
X
X
X
X
X
148 x 182 mm
(5.8 x 7.7 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X
X
X
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X
X
X
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X
X
X
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X
X
X
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X
X
X
1
This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size sensing
is turned off.
2
Only the standard exit bin supports this size.
3This size
setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.
4
To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 148 mm (5.8 in) and 216 mm (8.5 in); Universal length must
be between 182 mm (7.2 in) and 356 mm (14 in).
Note: An optional 250‑sheet Universally Adjustable Tray is available for sizes smaller than A5, such as index cards.
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 63–170 g/m2 (17–45 lb)
paper weights.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper type
91
250‑ or 550‑sheet
trays (standard or
optional)
Optional 2000‑sheet
tray
X
X
Multipurpose feeder
Duplex unit
Paper
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Plain
Bond
Colored
Custom
Letterhead
Light
Heavy
Preprinted
Rough/Cotton
Recycled
Card stock
Envelopes
X
Labels 1
• Paper
• Vinyl
Transparencies
1 Printing labels requires a special label fuser
cleaner which prevents duplexing. The label fuser cleaner is included with the
special cartridge required for label applications.
Paper types and weights supported by the finisher
Use this table to determine the possible output destinations of print jobs which use supported paper types and weights.
The paper capacity of each output bin is listed in parentheses. Paper capacity estimations are calculated based on
75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.
The Finisher supports 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb) paper weights.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper type
Finisher standard
bin (250 or 550
sheets)
92
Output Expander (550
sheets) or High
Capacity Output
Stacker (1850 sheets)
5‑Bin Mailbox
StapleSmart Finisher
(500 sheets)1
(500 sheets2)
Paper
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Plain
Bond
Colored
Custom
Letterhead
Light
Heavy
Preprinted
Rough/Cotton
Recycled
Card stock
X
Envelopes
X
X
Labels 3
X
X
X
X
• Paper
• Vinyl
Transparencies
1
Supports 60‑90 g/m2 (16‑24 lb) paper weights.
2
Maximum of 50 sheets per stapled packet.
3 Printing labels requires a special label fuser
cleaner which prevents duplexing. The label fuser cleaner is included with the
special cartridge required for label applications.
Copying
93
Copying
Scanner glass
A
ADF
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
Copying
94
4 Change the copy settings as needed.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
The copy screen appears.
3 Change the copy settings as needed.
4 Touch Copy It.
5 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.
6 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 On the home screen, touch Copy.
3 Touch Options.
4 Touch Content.
5 Touch Photograph.
6 Touch Done.
7 Touch Copy It.
8 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Making transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder and then place
transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
Copying
95
6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch the arrows until Transparency appears.
8 Touch Transparency, and then touch Continue.
9 Touch Copy It.
Copying to letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face up, top edge first in the multipurpose
feeder.
6 Touch the desired size of the letterhead, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch the arrows until Letterhead appears.
8 Touch Letterhead, and then touch Continue.
9 Touch Copy It.
Customizing copy settings
Copying from one size to another
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer will scale the size
automatically.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying
96
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty media
is located in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will need to also select the paper size and type.
6 Touch Copy It.
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and
the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a
single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying to mixed paper sizes
The printer has two paper trays, one tray loaded with letter‑size paper and the other with legal‑size paper. A document
that contains letter‑ and legal‑size pages needs to be copied.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Auto Size Sense.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Auto Size Match.
6 Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding
to the paper sizes of the original document.
Copying
97
Example 2: Copying to a single paper size
The printer has one paper tray, loaded with letter-size paper. A document that contains letter‑ and legal‑size pages
needs to be copied.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Letter/Legal.
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Letter.
6 Touch Copy It.
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal‑size pages to print on letter‑size
paper.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.
5 Touch Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
Copying
98
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Content.
6 Touch the button that best represents what you are copying:
• Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated
Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.
To turn collation off:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
Copying
99
5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.
6 Touch Copy It.
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Separator Sheets.
Note: Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is Off, the separator
sheets are added to the end of the print job.
6 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Select a duplex setting.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Paper Saver.
7 Select the desired output.
Copying
100
8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.
9 Touch Done.
10 Touch Copy It.
Creating a custom job (job build)
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set
may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner
scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the same
or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Custom Job.
6 Touch On.
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
9 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
10 If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown
on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise, touch
Finish the job.
Copying
101
Job interrupt
Job interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies.
Note: The Job Interrupt setting must be On for this feature to function.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
5 Touch Header/Footer.
6 Pick an area of the page to place the date and time.
7 Touch Date/Time, and then touch Continue.
8 Touch Done.
9 Touch Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft. To place
a message on the copies:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Options.
Copying
102
5 Touch Overlay.
6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.
7 Touch Done.
8 Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job
on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed
1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The remaining print job is canceled. The home screen appears.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy.
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting
displayed.
• When “Copy from” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Copy from” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Copying
103
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting
displayed.
• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder, and
manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching paper
size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it
takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser printer,
or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Copying
104
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Options
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,
Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, Content, Advanced Duplex, and Save as Shortcut
settings.
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also
called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single
page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes
the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, Color Balance, and mirror
image before you copy the document.
Custom Job
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Separator Sheets
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn
from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
Margin Shift
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or holepunch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin is
too large, then the copy will be cropped.
Edge Erase
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the selected
area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.
Header/Footer
This option turns on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified
header or footer location.
Copying
105
Overlay
This option creates a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between Urgent,
Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick
will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
Content
This option enhances copy quality. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.
•
•
•
•
Text—Use this setting when copying original documents that are mostly text or line art.
Text/Photo—Use this setting when copying original documents that are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.
Photograph—Use this setting when copying an original document that is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Printed Image—Use this setting when copying halftone photographs, documents printed on a laser printer, or pages
from a magazine or newspaper.
Advanced Duplex
This option controls whether the documents are one‑sided or two‑sided, what orientation your original documents
have, and how your documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.
Save as Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut.
Improving copy quality
Question
When should I use Text
mode?
Tip
• Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and preserving images
copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain
only text or fine line art.
When should I use
Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text
and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and
brochures.
When should I use Printed
Image mode?
Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents
printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper
When should I use
Photograph mode?
Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
E-mailing
106
E-mailing
Scanner glass
A
ADF
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.
To set up the e-mail function:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings.
5 Click Setup E-mail Server.
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
7 Click Add.
E-mailing
Configuring the e‑mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
4 Click E-mail Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
2 Type the recipient's e-mail address.
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Enter.
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
107
E-mailing
108
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Enter the e‑mail address or shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
5 Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
4 Touch E-mail It.
Sending an e-mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: box.
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add; or search the address book.
7 Touch E-mail It.
E-mailing
109
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e‑mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Subject.
7 Type the e-mail subject.
8 Touch Done.
9 Touch Message.
10 Type an e-mail message.
11 Touch Done.
12 Touch E-mail It.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
E-mailing
110
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
7 Touch E-mail It.
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, then enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Understanding e-mail options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with your new
setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper
sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the
Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
E-mail Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.
E-mailing
111
E-mail File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
E-mail Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it
takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This
increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail address.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan Preview,
Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror Image
before you copy the document
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
E-mailing
112
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out
Faxing
113
Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
Scanner glass
A
ADF
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
. The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5 Touch Fax It.
Faxing
114
Sending a fax using the computer
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility of
faxing documents directly from software programs.
Note: In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your
printer.
1 From your software program, click File > Print.
2 From the Print window, select your printer, and then click Properties.
3 Choose the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.
4 Click OK, and then click OK again.
5 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.
6 Click Send.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single
fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
6 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Faxing
115
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
5 Touch Save as Shortcut.
6 Enter a name for the shortcut.
7 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
8 Touch Fax It to send the fax, or touch
to return to the home screen.
Using shortcuts and the address book
Using fax shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers
when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can quickly and
easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
Using the address book
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
Faxing
116
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
(Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.)
6 Touch Search.
7 Touch the name to add it to the “Fax to” list.
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.
9 Touch Fax It.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5 Touch Options.
6 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
7 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.
5 Touch Options.
6 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
7 Touch Fax It.
Faxing
117
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.
5 Touch Options.
6 Touch Advanced Options.
7 Touch Delayed Send.
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.
8 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.
9 Touch Done.
10 Touch Fax it.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Reports.
4 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
Faxing
118
5 Click the Block No Name Fax option.
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new
setting displayed.
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photograph. Color can be
turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
Faxing
119
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it
takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This
increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the fax. Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount
of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
•
•
•
•
Standard—Suitable for most documents
Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission
Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.
• Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter the
time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in sending
information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror Image
before you fax the document
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
• Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is
paused, and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Advanced Duplex—Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has, and whether original
documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.
Faxing
120
Improving fax quality
Question
When should I use Text
mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and preserving images
copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that
contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use
Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and
graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Photo
mode?
Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or
newspaper.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click Holding Faxes.
6 Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.
7 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
8 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps. Otherwise, go to step 9.
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
9 Click Add.
Faxing
121
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
• Print
• Print and Forward
• Forward
6 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
• Fax
• E‑mail
• FTP
• LDSS
• eSF
7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward
to” menu.
8 Click Submit.
Scanning to an FTP address
122
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanner glass
A
ADF
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent
to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending a
document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your
network instead of over the phone line.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.
4 Type the FTP address.
5 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address
123
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.
4 Touch Search Address Book.
5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: field.
7 Touch Send It.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP
server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating
shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.
Scanning to an FTP address
124
6 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 On the home screen, touch FTP.
2 Type the address of the FTP site.
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.
4 Enter a name for the shortcut.
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
6 Touch Send It to start the scan, or touch
to return to the home screen.
Understanding FTP options
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new
setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper
sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the
Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Binding
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Scanning to an FTP address
125
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it
takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This
increases the amount of information saved.
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site,
computer, e-mail address, or the printer.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts image output settings before you scan the document
– Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease
the white portion.
– Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting a
color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.
–
–
–
–
–
Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.
JPEG Quality—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the image compression.
Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.
Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.
Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.
Scanning to an FTP address
126
– Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.
– Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out
Improving FTP quality
Question
When should I use Text
mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a document to an FTP site,
and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only contain
text or fine line art.
When should I use
Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that contains a mixture of
text and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Photo Use Photo mode when the original document is composed mostly of photos printed on a laser
mode?
printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
127
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Scanner glass
A
ADF
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Scan Profile.
3 Click Create.
4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
6 Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
7 Click Submit.
8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
128
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
c Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.
d After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
9 Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The Held Jobs screen appears.
4 Touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Select the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.
Understanding scan profile options
Quick Setup
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:
Custom
Photo - Color JPEG
Text - BW PDF
Photo - Color TIFF
Text - BW TIFF
Text/Photo - BW PDF
Text/Photo - Color PDF
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as needed.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
129
Format Type
This option sets the output (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, SECURE PDF, or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Compression
This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file.
Default Content
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the
quality and size of your scanned file.
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to
scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the
amount of information saved.
Color
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Orientation
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes the
Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.
Sides (Duplex)
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
130
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Color Dropout before you
scan the document. It also lets you Scan edge to edge, as a Mirror Image, or as a Negative Image.
• Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease
the white portion.
•
•
•
•
Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.
•
•
•
•
Color Dropout Threshold—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the amount of color dropout.
Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.
Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.
Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting a color
eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.
Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.
Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.
Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.
Improving scan quality
Question
When should I use Text
mode?
Tip
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and preserving images
copied from the original document is not a concern.
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only
contain text or fine line art.
When should I use
Text/Photo mode?
• Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text
and graphics.
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Photo
mode?
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or
newspaper.
Printing
131
Printing
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancelation. Selection and handling of paper and specialty media
can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 140 and “Storing paper”
on page 88.
Printing a document
1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
3 Do one of the following:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded
paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
c Click OK, and then click Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Printing
132
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
– “Loading the standard or optional 250‑sheet or 550‑sheet tray” on page 72
– “Loading the 2000‑sheet tray” on page 75
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 79
Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:
• Feed transparencies from a 250‑sheet tray, a 550‑sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
•
•
•
•
Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.
To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
We recommend Lexmark part number 12A5010 for A4‑size transparencies and Lexmark part number 70X7240 for
letter‑size transparencies.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on envelopes:
• Feed envelopes from the multipurpose feeder or the optional envelope feeder.
• Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All‑cotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g/m2
(24 lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
Printing
133
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Notes:
• Paper, dual‑web paper, polyester, and vinyl labels are supported.
• When using the duplex unit, specially‑designed, integrated, and dual‑web paper labels are supported.
• Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which is included with the special cartridge required for
label applications. For more information, see “Ordering supplies” on page 255.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.
When printing on labels:
• Feed labels from a 250‑sheet tray, a 550‑sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6‑mm (0.06‑in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and
use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:
• Feed card stock from a 250‑sheet tray, a 550‑sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
Printing
134
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Holding jobs in the printer
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you start
the job from the printer control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Job type
Description
Confidential
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN from
the computer. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The job is held
in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel and
choose to print or delete the job.
Verify
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the
remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy to see
if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies are printed,
the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.
Reserve
When you send a Reserve print job, the printer does not print the job immediately.
It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later. The job is held in memory
until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.
Repeat
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of the
job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later. You can
print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.
Other types of held jobs include:
•
•
•
•
Profiles from various sources including Lexmark Document Solutions Suite (LDSS)
Forms from a kiosk
Bookmarks
Jobs not printed, which are called parked jobs
Printing
135
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.
4 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,
also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
6 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
7 Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
8 Touch Confidential Jobs.
9 Enter your PIN.
10 Touch the job you want to print.
11 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,
also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.
5 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.
6 Touch your user name.
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.
7 Touch Confidential Jobs.
8 Enter your PIN.
9 Touch the job you want to print.
10 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.
Printing
136
Printing from a flash drive
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types. Supported file types
include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.
Many flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer. For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site
at www.lexmark.com.
Notes:
• Hi‑Speed flash drives must support the Full‑speed standard. Flash drives supporting only USB Low‑speed
capabilities are not supported.
• USB devices must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New
Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.
• If selecting an encrypted .pdf file, then enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
To print from a flash drive:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, then Printer Busy appears. After the
other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
3 Touch the document you want to print.
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension type (for
example, .jpg).
Printing
137
4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies.
5 Touch Print.
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print .pdf files
from the flash drive as held jobs.
Printing information pages
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Reports.
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directory appears.
5 Touch Print Directory.
Printing the print quality test pages
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down
2
ABC
and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on.
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power‑on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
5 Touch Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
6 Touch Back.
7 Touch Exit Configuration.
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
on the keypad.
Printing
138
Canceling a print job from the computer
To cancel a print job, do one of the following:
For Windows users
In Windows Vista:
1 Click
.
2 Click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound.
4 Click Printers.
5 Double‑click the printer icon.
6 Select the job to cancel.
7 From the keyboard, press Delete.
In Windows XP:
1 Click Start.
2 From Printers and Faxes, double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the job to cancel.
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.
From the Windows taskbar:
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1 Double‑click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select a job to cancel.
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5:
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax, and then double‑click the printer icon.
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double‑click Utilities, and then double‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Double‑click the printer icon.
Printing
4 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
139
Clearing jams
140
Clearing jams
Jam error messages appear on the control panel display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred.
When there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.
Avoiding jams
The following hints can help you avoid jams.
Paper tray recommendations
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
• Do not remove trays while the printer is printing.
• Do not load trays, the multipurpose feeder, or the envelope feeder while the printer is printing. Load them prior
to printing, or wait for a prompt to load them.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
• Make sure the guides in the paper trays, multipurpose feeder, or envelope feeder are properly positioned and are
not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.
• Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.
Paper recommendations
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media. For more information, see “Paper types and weights supported
by the printer” on page 90.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Envelope recommendations
• To reduce wrinkling, use the Envelope Enhance menu in the Paper menu.
• Do not feed envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
Clearing jams
141
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. Open doors and covers and remove trays to access
jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.
The following table lists the jams that can occur and the location of each jam:
9
9
1
1
6,7,8
2
2
4
5
3
3
Jam numbers Area
1
200–202
Printer
2
230–239
Duplex unit
3
240–249
Paper tray
4
250
Multipurpose feeder
5
260
Envelope feeder
6
270–279
Optional output bin
7
280–282
Finisher
8
283
Stapler
9
290–294
ADF cover
200 and 201 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Lower the multipurpose feeder door.
4
Clearing jams
142
3 Push the release latch, and then open the front cover.
3
4 Lift and pull the print cartridge out of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum on the underside of the cartridge. Use
the cartridge handle whenever you are holding the cartridge.
Clearing jams
143
5 Place the print cartridge aside.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not leave the cartridge exposed to light for extended periods.
Warning—Potential Damage: The jammed paper may be covered with unfused toner which can stain garments
and skin.
6 Remove the jammed paper.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Note: If the paper is not easy to remove, then open the rear door and remove the paper from there.
7 Align and reinstall the print cartridge.
8 Close the front cover.
9 Close the multipurpose feeder door.
10 Touch Continue.
202 paper jam
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. If the paper is exiting the printer, then pull the paper out,
and then touch Continue.
If the paper is not exiting the printer:
1 Pull down the top rear door.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
3 Close the top rear door.
4 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
230–239 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull the standard tray out.
3 Pull down the bottom rear door.
4 Push the tab down.
5 Remove the jammed paper.
6 Close the bottom rear door.
7 Insert the standard tray.
8 Touch Continue.
144
Clearing jams
240–249 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull the standard tray out.
3 Remove any jammed paper, and then close the tray.
4 Touch Continue.
5 If the jam message persists, then pull out any optional trays.
6 Remove the jammed paper, and then insert the trays.
7 Touch Continue.
145
Clearing jams
146
250 paper jam
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.
3 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
4 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.
5 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.
6 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
147
260 paper jam
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. The envelope feeder feeds envelopes from the bottom of
the stack; the bottom envelope will be the one that is jammed.
1 Lift the envelope weight.
2 Remove all envelopes.
3 If the jammed envelope has entered the printer and cannot be pulled out, then lift the envelope feeder up and then
out of the printer, and then set it aside.
4 Remove the envelope from the printer.
Note: If you cannot remove the envelope, then the print cartridge will have to be removed. For more
information, see “200 and 201 paper jams” on page 141.
5 Reinstall the envelope feeder. Make sure it snaps into place.
6 Flex and stack the envelopes.
7 Load the envelopes in the envelope feeder.
8 Adjust the paper guide.
9 Lower the envelope weight.
10 Touch Continue.
270–279 paper jams
To clear a jam in the high‑capacity output stacker or the 4‑bin mailbox:
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 If the paper is exiting into a bin, then pull the paper straight out, and then touch Continue.
If not, then continue with step 3.
3 Pull down the output bin door or doors.
4 Remove the jammed paper.
5 Close the output bin door or doors.
6 Touch Continue.
280–282 paper jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Pull down the StapleSmart finisher door.
3 Remove the jammed paper.
4 Close the StapleSmart finisher door.
5 Touch Continue.
Clearing jams
283 staple jams
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.
2 Press the latch to open the stapler door.
3 Pull the latch of the staple cartridge holder down, and then pull the holder out of the printer.
148
Clearing jams
4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.
5 Close the staple guard.
6 Press down on the staple guard until it snaps into place.
149
Clearing jams
7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place.
8 Close the stapler door.
290–294 paper jams
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.
3 Close the ADF cover.
4 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.
150
Clearing jams
151
5 Open the bottom ADF door, and then remove any jammed pages.
1
2
6 Close the bottom ADF door and scanner cover.
7 Touch Restart Job.
Understanding printer menus
152
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus, touch
on the home screen.
Paper Menu
Reports
Network/Ports
Default Source
Menu Settings Page
Active NIC
Paper Size/Type
Device Statistics
Standard Network2
Configure MP
Network Setup Page
SMTP Setup
Envelope Enhance
Substitute Size
Network <x> Setup Page
Standard USB
Paper Texture
Shortcut List
Paper Weight
Fax Job Log
Paper Loading
Fax Call Log
Custom Types
Copy Shortcuts
Custom Names
E‑mail Shortcuts
Custom Scan Sizes
Fax Shortcuts
Custom Bin Names
Universal Setup
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Bin Setup
NetWare Setup Page
Wireless Setup
Page1
Parallel <x>
Serial <x>
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
1
Only appears if a wireless card is installed.
2
Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network <x>.
Security
Settings
Help
Edit Security Setups
General Settings
Print all guides
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Copy Settings
Copy guide
Confidential Print
Fax Settings
E‑mail guide
Disc Wiping
E‑mail Settings
Fax guide
Security Audit Log
FTP Settings
FTP guide
Set Date and Time
Flash Drive Menu
Information guide
Print Settings
Print Defects guide
Supplies Guide
Understanding printer menus
153
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item
Description
Default Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Env
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.
• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source
setting for the duration of the print job.
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When
one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Menu item
Description
Tray <x> Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray
Executive1
Notes:
• A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory
default setting.
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the
hardware appears.
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. If the same size
and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type
settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
Oficio1
Folio
Statement1
Universal
• Automatic size sensing is not supported for Oficio, Folio, or Statement
paper sizes.
• The 2000‑sheet tray supports A4, Letter, and Legal paper sizes.
1
Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus
154
Menu item
Description
Tray <x> Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type <x>
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder
1
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type <x> is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom
Type <x>.
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. If the same size
and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type
settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.
Notes:
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order
for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
• A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory
default setting.
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size. The
paper size value must be set.
Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus
155
Menu item
Description
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type <x>
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Envelope Feeder Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
Specifies the envelope size loaded in the envelope feeder
Envelope Feeder Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type <x>
Specifies the type of envelope loaded in the envelope feeder
Notes:
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order
for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Note: DL Envelope is the international factory default setting. 10 Envelope is
the US factory default setting.
Notes:
• Envelope is the factory default setting.
• The Custom Type setting can be used to store up to six types of
envelopes.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio
Folio
Statement
Universal
1
Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded
Note: A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory
default setting.
Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus
156
Menu item
Description
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type <x>
Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
Other Envelope
Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type <x>
Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded
1
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Note: DL Envelope is the international factory default setting. 10 Envelope is
the US factory default setting.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Menu item
Description
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting.
• The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an automatic
paper source.
• When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only for
manual feed print jobs.
• If paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder and First is selected, then
paper always feeds from the multipurpose feeder first.
Understanding printer menus
157
Envelope Enhance
The envelope conditioner significantly reduces the wrinkling of some envelopes.
Menu item
Description
Envelope Enhance
Off
1 (Least)
2
3
4
5
6 (Most)
Enables or disables the envelope conditioner
Notes:
• The factory default setting is 5.
• If noise reduction is more important than wrinkle reduction, then
decrease the setting.
Substitute Size menu
Menu item
Description
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message
appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Menu item
Description
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
158
Menu item
Description
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Rough Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
159
Menu item
Description
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Rough Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Custom <x> Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Menu item
Description
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific tray
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
160
Menu item
Description
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Light Weight
Light
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Rough Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray
Custom <x>
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific tray
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Understanding printer menus
161
Paper Loading menu
Menu item
Description
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type
Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Vinyl Labels as the paper type
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Light as the paper type
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type
Rough Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Rough as the paper type
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1‑sided jobs.
Understanding printer menus
162
Menu item
Description
Custom <x> Loading
Duplex
Off
Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Custom <x> as the paper type
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1‑sided jobs.
Custom Types menu
Menu item
Description
Custom Type <x>
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type <x> name or a user‑defined Custom Name created from the Embedded
Web Server or MarkVision Professional
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Menu item
Definition
Custom Name <x>
<none>
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom Type
<x> name in the printer menus.
Understanding printer menus
163
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item
Description
Custom Scan Size <x>
Scan Size Name
Width
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Height
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)
Orientation
Landscape
Portrait
2 scans per side
Off
On
ADF Pick Roller Force
User Default
30%
40%
50%
60%
70%
80%
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom
Scan Size <x> name in the printer menus.
Notes:
• 8.5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Width.
• 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
• Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
• User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force.
Custom Bin Names menu
Menu Item
Description
Standard Bin
Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin
Bin 1
Specifies a custom name for Bin 1
Universal Setup menu
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal
Paper Size is a user‑defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options,
such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.
Menu item
Description
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identifies the units of measure
Notes:
• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
164
Menu item
Description
Portrait Width
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Sets the portrait width
Notes:
• If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum
width allowed.
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased
in 0.01‑inch increments.
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14 inches
76–360 mm
Sets the portrait height
Notes:
• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum
height allowed.
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01‑inch increments.
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.
Bin Setup menu
Menu Item
Description
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Identifies installed output bins
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
165
Menu Item
Description
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Mail Overflow
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Specifies configuration options for output bins
Notes:
• Mailbox is the factory default setting.
• The Mailbox setting treats each bin as a separate
mailbox.
• The Link setting links together all available output
bins.
• The Mail Overflow setting treats each bin as a
separate mailbox until a bin becomes full, and then
the printer automatically diverts sheets to an
overflow bin.
• The Link Optional setting links together all available
output bins except the standard bin and only appears
when at least two optional bins are installed.
• The Type Assignment setting assigns each paper type
to an output bin.
Selects an output bin for each supported paper type
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Labels Bin
Vinyl Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Bin
Heavy Bin
Rough Bin
Custom <x> Bin
Available selections for each type are:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Reports menu
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.
Menu item
Description
Menu Settings Page
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed
memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the control panel language, the
TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network connection, and
other information
Understanding printer menus
166
Menu item
Description
Device Statistics
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages
Network Setup Page
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network <x> Setup Page
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
• This menu item is available when more than one network option is
installed.
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to
print servers.
Wireless Setup Page
Prints a report containing information about the wireless network printer
settings, such as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:
• This menu item is available when a wireless card is installed and Lexmark
Document Solutions Suite is enabled.
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to
print servers.
Shortcut List
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Fax Job Log
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Fax Call Log
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls
Copy Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Profiles List
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
NetWare Setup Page
Prints a report containing NetWare‑specific information about the network
settings
Note: This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server
installed.
Print Fonts
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer
Understanding printer menus
167
Menu item
Description
Print Directory
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed correctly
and working properly.
Asset Report
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item
Description
Active NIC
Auto
<list of available network cards>
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network <x> menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
168
Menu item
Description
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears if a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The On value buffers jobs on the printer hard disk. This menu selection
appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective.
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data
from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Understanding printer menus
169
Menu item
Description
Std Network Setup
Reports or Network Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
AppleTalk
NetWare
LexLink
For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus, see the following:
Net <x> Setup
Reports or Network Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
NetWare
LexLink
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Network Reports menu” on page 170
“Network Card menu” on page 170
“TCP/IP menu” on page 171
“IPv6 menu” on page 172
“Wireless menu” on page 172
“AppleTalk menu” on page 173
“NetWare menu” on page 173
“LexLink menu” on page 174
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
SMTP Setup menu
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server.
Menu item
Description
Primary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send the e‑mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address
Specifies server information. This is a required item.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Notes:
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login / Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges
• The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
• Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
170
Menu item
Description
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specifies server information
Notes:
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and Password
Prompt User
• The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters.
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Network Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > Reports or Network
Reports
Menu item
Description
Print Setup Page
Prints a report containing information about the current network setup
Print NetWare Setup
Page
Notes:
• The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings, such as the
TCP/IP address.
• The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support NetWare and
shows information about NetWare settings.
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > Network Card
Menu item
Description
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card
View Card Speed
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Lets you view the network addresses
Understanding printer menus
171
Menu item
Description
Job Timeout
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before it
is canceled
0‑225 seconds
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allows the printer to print a banner page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > TCP/IP
Menu item
Description
Activate
On
Off
Activates TCP/IP
View Hostname
Lets you view the current TCP/IP hostname
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Netmask
Gateway
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Gateway
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
172
Menu item
Description
AutoIP
Yes
No
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using the
File Transfer Protocol.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.
WINS Server Address
Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address
DNS Server Address
Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > IPv6
Menu item
Description
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enables IPv6 in the printer
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router
View Hostname
Lets you view the current setting
View Address
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Network <x> > Net <x> Setup > Wireless
Understanding printer menus
173
Menu item
Description
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specifies the network mode
Notes:
• Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an
access point.
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. Ad hoc mode configures the
printer for wireless networking directly between it and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11n
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network
Choose Network
<list of available networks>
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
View Signal Quality
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
View Security Mode
Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection.
“Disabled” indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > AppleTalk
Menu item
Description
Activate
On
Off
Activates AppleTalk support
View Name
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone
<list of zones available on the
network>
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
Note: The default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default
zone exists, the zone marked with an * is the default setting.
NetWare menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > NetWare
Understanding printer menus
174
Menu item
Description
Activate
Yes
No
Activates NetWare support
View Login Name
Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Print Mode
Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Network Number
Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Select SAP Frames
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet Type II
Ethernet SNAP
Enables the Ethernet frame type setting
Packet Burst
Yes
No
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of
multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server
NSQ/GSQ Mode
Yes
No
Specifies the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting
Note: On is the factory default setting for all menu items.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
LexLink menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network <x> > Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup > LexLink menu
Menu item
Description
Activate
On
Off
Activates LexLink support
View Nickname
Lets you view the assigned LexLink nickname
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: The LexLink nickname can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Understanding printer menus
175
Standard USB menu
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1‑K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save setting is On
or Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
176
Menu item
Description
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data
from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
USB With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print
server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel <x> menu
This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed.
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
177
Menu item
Description
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <max size allowed>
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Off is the factory default setting.
The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the printer hard disk.
The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data
from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specifies the parallel port protocol
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Understanding printer menus
178
Menu item
Description
Honor Init
On
Off
Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization
requests from the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determines whether the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge
of strobe
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Parallel With ENA
ENA Address
ENA Netmask
ENA Gateway
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print
server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through a parallel port.
Serial <x> menu
This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed.
Menu item
Description
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding printer menus
179
Menu item
Description
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• When the On setting is used, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data
is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• When the Auto setting is used, the printer examines data, determines the
format, and then processes it appropriately.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to <maximum size allowed>
Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the
disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, USB, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Off is the factory default setting.
The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the hard disk.
The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data
from another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
180
Menu item
Description
Serial Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XON/XOFF/DTRDSR
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Robust XON
On
Off
Notes:
•
•
•
•
DTR is the factory default setting.
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the computer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port
Data Bits
7
8
Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal. DSR is a handshaking signal used
by most serial cables.
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option or
Serial Option 2 menus.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data
created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause
stray characters to print. Select On to prevent stray characters from printing.
• This menu item appears only if Serial RS‑232/RS‑422 is set to RS 232.
Understanding printer menus
181
Security menu
Miscellaneous menu
Menu item
Description
Panel Logins
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Login timeout
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home
screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900
seconds. 300 seconds is the factory default setting.
Remote Logins
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Login timeout
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from a computer before
all remote users are locked out
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the remote interface remains idle before
automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900 seconds. 300
seconds is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Menu item
Description
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:
• Off is the default setting.
• This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed.
• Once a limit is reached, the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Understanding printer menus
182
Menu item
Description
Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is deleted
Notes:
• Off is the default setting.
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on the
printer RAM or printer hard disk, the expiration time for those print jobs does
not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are
deleted.
Disk Wiping menu
Menu item
Description
Automatic Wiping
Off
On
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Automatic Wiping marks all disk space used by a previous job and does not permit
the file system to reuse this space until it has been sanitized.
Only Automatic Wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to take
the printer offline for an extended amount of time.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
• Off is the default setting.
• Due to the large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping,
activating this option may decrease printer performance, especially if the
printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to
service.
Manual Wiping
Start now
Do not start now
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print
job that has been processed (i.e. printed). This type of wipe does not erase any
information related to an unprocessed print job.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
• "Do not start now" is the default setting.
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk
wipe.
Understanding printer menus
183
Menu item
Description
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
• Single pass is the default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass
method only.
Manual Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space
without first having to wipe it.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
• Single pass is the default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass
method only.
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system
from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved,
such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space
without first having to wipe it.
Notes:
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
• Single pass is the default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass
method only.
• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or
confirmation message.
Security Audit Log menu
Menu item
Description
Export Log
Enables an authorized user to export the security log
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the printer.
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer.
Understanding printer menus
184
Menu item
Description
Delete Log
Delete now
Do not delete
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Enable Remote Syslog
Remote Syslog Facility
Severity of events to log
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created
Note: Delete Now is the factory default setting.
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.
Set Date/Time menu
Menu item
Description
View Date/Time
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer
Set Date/Time
<input date/time>
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.
Time Zone
<list of time zones>
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Observe DST
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
185
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item
Description
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display
Eco‑Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected but not print quality.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job by duplexing each page. Performance
may be affected but not print quality.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
186
Menu item
Description
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard
Notes:
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
Country select screen, the default becomes No.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Turkce
Korean
Custom Key <x>
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer
control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent
marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard.
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Specifies the printer factory default measurements. The default is
determined by the country/region selection in the initial setup
wizard.
Understanding printer menus
187
Menu item
Description
Scan to PC Port Range
<port range>
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text <x>
<text entry>
Black Toner
Display When Supply Registers
Off
Early Warning
Low
Near End of Life
End of Life
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of
the home screen
For the Left side and Right side options, choose from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Cartridge Level
Custom Text <x>
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
• Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply
Registers.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
The displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service
Errors can be customized with the following options:
Activate
Yes
No
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
<text entry>
Alternate Message
<text entry>
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Understanding printer menus
188
Menu item
Description
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen, and default
buttons can be removed.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Formats the printer date
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Formats the printer time
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen
One Page Copy
On
Off
Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time
Available selections for each button are:
Display
Do Not Display
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
189
Menu item
Description
Output Lighting
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional output
bin
Notes:
• In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default is Bright.
• In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Output Option Bin LEDs
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Show Bookmarks
On
Off
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during
copy, fax, e‑mail, FTP, or scan to USB
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF
Note: On is the factory default setting. When On is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow
Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Notes:
• If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if
any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name
Specifies a contact name for the printer
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Understanding printer menus
190
Menu item
Description
Location
Specifies the location of the printer
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention
Available selections for each alarm type are:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm and Staple
Alarm. Off means no alarm will sound.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
• Staple Alarm is available only when the finisher is installed.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
Disabled
5–255
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue
Notes:
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
2–240
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system
enters a lower power state
Timeouts
Power Saver Mode
Disabled
2–240
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems
begin entering a minimum power state.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to a Ready state
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 60 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
191
Menu item
Description
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print job
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation
print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job
Notes:
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or
PPDS emulation print jobs.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• 5–255 is a range of time in seconds.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages
is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
On
Off
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Understanding printer menus
192
Menu item
Description
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore
keeps the user‑defined settings.
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default
settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads
stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash
memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Menu item
Description
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Printed Image
Text
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original
documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.
• Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures.
This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction
of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the
amount of information saved.
• Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images. Printed
Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a grayscale or color
image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a limited
number of colors.
• Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white
background.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two‑sided) or simplex (one-sided),
and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied
page will have printing on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets,
the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied
page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is
three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy
is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy
mimics the original exactly.
Understanding printer menus
193
Menu item
Description
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the margins
Collate
On
Off
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of
the job
Staple
On
Off
Enables stapling
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the original document
Copy To Source
Tray <x>
Single Sheet Feeder
Multi Sheet Feeder
Auto Size Match
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
194
Menu item
Description
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Specifies a paper source
Darkness
1–9
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed
Number of Copies
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job
Header/Footer
Top left
Top left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the page
Header/Footer
Top middle
Top middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the page
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top left.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
195
Menu item
Description
Header/Footer
Top right
Top right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the page
Header/Footer
Bottom left
Bottom left
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the page
Header/Footer
Bottom middle
Bottom middle
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Top right.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Understanding printer menus
196
Menu item
Description
Header/Footer
Bottom right
Bottom right
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Bates number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Enter custom text
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the page
Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job
Custom Overlay
Specifies custom overlay text
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts
Background Removal
‑4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Auto Center
On
Off
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
197
Menu item
Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to copying
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy
Sample Copy
On
Off
Creates a sample copy of the original document
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
Understanding printer menus
198
General Fax Settings
Menu item
Description
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never Use
Always Use
Include To field
On
Off
Include From field
On
Off
From
Include Message field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer <x>
Footer <x>
Configures the fax cover page
Station Name
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer
Station Number
Specifies a number associated with the fax
Station ID
Station Name
Station Number
Specifies how the fax is identified
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
hand set
Note: Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Notes:
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs
Notes:
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
Understanding printer menus
199
Menu item
Description
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs
Caller ID
FSK
DTMF
Specifies type of caller ID being used
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number
Digits to mask
0–58
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it will not appear as an option.
Note: FSK is the factory default setting.
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.
Fax Send Settings
Menu item
Description
Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,
but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Understanding printer menus
200
Menu item
Description
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Dial Prefix
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule <x>
Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number
Redial Frequency
1–200
Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Behind a PABX
Off
On
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Enable ECM
On
Off
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer
Driver to fax
On
Off
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
201
Menu item
Description
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Background Removal
‑4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Auto Center
On
Off
Lets you automatically center the fax on the page
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
202
Menu item
Description
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a fax
Enable Color Fax Scans
On by default
Never use
Always use
Off by default
Enables color faxing
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono
Faxes
On
Off
Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Menu item
Description
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax
source
Paper Source
Auto
Tray <x>
Multi‑Purpose Feeder
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming
fax
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin 1<x>
Specifies an output bin for received faxes
Sides (Duplex)
On
Off
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs
Fax Footer
On
Off
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
203
Menu item
Description
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Fax Forwarding
Forward
Print
Print and Forward
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded
Forward to Shortcut
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FPT, LDSS, or eSF)
Block No Name Fax
On
Off
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Banned Fax List
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule
Staple
On
Off
Specifies the default staple setting for the attached finisher
Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear.
Fax Log Settings
Menu item
Description
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error
Understanding printer menus
204
Menu item
Description
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enables automatic printing of fax logs
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Job log
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enables access to the Fax Call log
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed
Note: Logs print after every 200 jobs.
Speaker Settings
Menu item
Description
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Notes:
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
• On until Connected is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and issues a
noise until the fax connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Controls the volume setting
Ringer Volume
On
Off
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Distinctive Rings
Menu item
Description
Single Ring
On
Off
Answers calls with a one‑ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
205
Menu item
Description
Double Ring
On
Off
Answers calls with a double‑ring pattern
Triple Ring
On
Off
Answers calls with a triple‑ring pattern
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Fax Server Setup
Menu item
Description
To Format
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Reply Address
Subject
Message
Primary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Specifies SMTP server port information
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specifies the image type for scan to fax
Content
Text
Text/Photo
Photograph
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax
Notes:
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
206
Menu item
Description
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
On
Off
Enables analog fax receive
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Menu item
Description
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
Specifies e‑mail server information
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
Understanding printer menus
207
Menu item
Description
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail
E‑mail Server Setup
Max e‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name, such as a company
domain name
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.
Notes:
• E-mail can only be sent to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
Base file name
Web Link
Defines the path name
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the file
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e‑mail
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e‑mail
Note: Defines the path. For example: /directory/path
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name: * : ? <
> |.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print.
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Understanding printer menus
208
Menu item
Description
Color
Gray
Color
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Understanding printer menus
209
Menu item
Description
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
•
•
•
•
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specifies how the images will be sent
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Specifies an output bin for the printed e‑mail log
E‑mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
210
Menu item
Description
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image
Auto Center
On
Off
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Use cc:/bcc:
On
Off
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
211
FTP Settings menu
Menu item
Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the FTP file
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Color
Gray
Color
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
212
Menu item
Description
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Understanding printer menus
213
Menu item
Description
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specifies whether the transmission log prints
Log Paper Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Manual Env
MP Feeder
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin <x>
Specifies an output bin for the FTP log
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Base File Name
Lets you enter a base file name
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses
Background Removal
‑4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Auto Center
On
Off
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Understanding printer menus
214
Menu item
Description
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item
Description
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specifies the format of the file
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB
Content
Text/Photo
Photograph
Text
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the
documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet
print
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.
Color
Gray
Color
Specifies whether job prints in grayscale or color
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
215
Menu item
Description
Resolution
75
150
200
300
400
600
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned
Darkness
1–9
Lightens or darkens the output
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size <x>
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Letter/Legal
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
Understanding printer menus
216
Menu item
Description
Photo JPEG Quality
5–90
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:
•
•
•
•
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the
quality of the image.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
50 is the factory default setting.
“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Scan bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off
Base File Name
Lets you enter a base file name
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Background Removal
‑4 to +4
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy
Auto Center
On
Off
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
217
Menu item
Description
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specifies the contrast of the output
Mirror Image
On
Off
Creates a mirror image of the original document
Negative Image
On
Off
Creates a negative image of the original document
Shadow Detail
0–4
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image
Scan edge to edge
On
Off
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge
Sharpness
0–5
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Menu item
Description
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print
Paper Source
Tray <x>
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from the
flash drive
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
Understanding printer menus
218
Menu item
Description
Sides (Duplex)
On
Off
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing)
Staple
On
Off
Enables stapling
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages
and the top edge of landscape pages.
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages
and the left edge of landscape pages.
Orientation
Auto
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the print job
N‑up (pages/side)
Off
2 Up
3 Up
4 Up
6 Up
9 Up
12 Up
16 Up
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.
N‑up Border
None
Solid
Prints a border around each page image when using N‑up
N‑up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images when using N‑up
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
This is also referred to as Paper Saver.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selected
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
219
Menu item
Description
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Specifies a paper source
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item
Description
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Sets the default printer language
Notes:
• PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for
processing print jobs.
• PCL is the factory default printer language.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. They are
stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When
the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored
jobs print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a non-Read Only printer hard disk
is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are
not deleted if the printer loses power.
Understanding printer menus
220
Menu item
Description
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:
• This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in the
printer Setup menu.
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• The Whole Page setting allows the image to be moved into
the non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but
the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting
boundary.
• The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using a
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages
printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
• Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.
• This menu appears only if a flash and/or disk option is
installed.
Job Accounting
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information about
the most recent print jobs on the hard disk
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off means the printer does
not store job statistics.
• The statistics include a record of print errors, the print time,
the job size in bytes, the requested paper size and type, the
total number of printed pages, and the total number of
copies requested.
• Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk is
installed and working properly. It should not be Read/Write
or Write protected. Job Buffer Size should not be set to
100%.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then
exiting the menus causes the printer to reset. The menu
selection is updated.
Understanding printer menus
221
Menu item
Description
Resource Save
On
Off
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a job
that requires more memory than is available
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
the downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
• The On setting retains the downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, 38 Memory Full appears, and downloads are
not deleted.
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected
Print All Order
Alphabetically
Newest First
Oldest First
Notes:
• Alphabetically is the factory default setting.
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer
control panel.
Finishing menu
Menu item
Description
Sides (Duplex)
2 sided
1 sided
Specifies whether duplex (2‑sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• To set 2‑sided printing from the software program: for Windows users, click
File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup; for
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the
page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages
and the top edge of landscape pages.
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages
and the left edge of landscape pages.
Copies
1–999
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
222
Menu item
Description
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copies
menu setting.
Separator Sheets
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between
each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a
document for notes.
Separator Source
Tray <x>
Multi‑Purpose Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
Multi‑Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
N‑up (pages‑side)
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper
N‑up Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images when using N‑up (pages‑sides)
Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page sheet
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Understanding printer menus
223
Menu item
Description
N‑up Border
None
Solid
Prints a border around each page image when using N‑up (pages‑sides)
Staple Job
Off
On
Specifies whether print jobs are stapled
Offset Pages
Off
Between Jobs
Between Copies
Stacks copies or print jobs into staggered sets in an output bin
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• This menu item is available only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed.
• Off is the factory default setting. Print jobs are not stapled.
• Envelopes are not stapled.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
This menu item appears only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed.
Off is the factory default setting. No pages are offset during the print job.
Between Jobs offsets each print job.
Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job.
Quality menu
Menu item
Description
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specifies the printed output resolution
Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both Directions
Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics
Toner Darkness
1–10
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting. The printer driver default is 1200 IQ.
Notes:
•
•
•
•
•
Off is the factory default setting.
Fonts applies this setting only to text.
Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images.
Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images.
Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images.
Lightens or darkens the printed output
Notes:
• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Understanding printer menus
224
Menu item
Description
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network
printer IP address in a browser window.
Gray Correction
Auto
Off
Adjusts the gray value of printed output
Brightness
‑6 to +6
Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• A negative value will darken text, images, and graphics. A positive value will
lighten them and conserve toner.
Contrast
0–5
Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray.
Utilities menu
Menu item
Description
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.
• Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not restored
from the disk.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Formats the flash memory. Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing
a flash memory option card in the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
formatting.
Notes:
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating
properly for this menu item to be available. The flash memory option card
must not be Read/Write or Write protected.
• Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
Understanding printer menus
225
Menu item
Description
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held Jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs. Job accounting information is not affected.
Job Acct Stat
Print
Clear
Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer hard
disk
Note: Delete Now is the default setting.
Notes:
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly for
this menu item to be available.
• Selecting Print prints a list of statistics.
• Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk.
• The Clear selection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to MarkTrackTM
using NPA.
Hex Trace
Activate
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:
• When Activate is selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal
and character representation and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
LCD Contrast
1–10
Adjusts the contrast lighting of the display
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 5 is the factory default setting.
• A higher setting makes the display appear lighter.
• A lower setting makes the display appear darker.
LCD Brightness
1–10
Adjusts the brightness of the backlight on the display
Notes:
• 5 is the factory default setting.
• A higher setting makes the display appear lighter.
• A lower setting makes the display appear darker.
PDF menu
Menu item
Description
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
226
Menu item
Description
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Menu item
Description
Print PS Error
On
Off
Prints a page containing the PostScript error
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establishes the font search order
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be
installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be
available.
• The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read/Write,
Write, or password protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
PCL Emul menu
Menu item
Description
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
fonts downloaded into printer RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings appear only if applicable and show all fonts
resident in that option.
• Flash and Disk options must be properly formatted and cannot be
Read/Write, Write, or password protected.
• Download appears only if applicable and shows all the fonts downloaded
into printer RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
<list of available fonts>
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored
Notes:
• Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
• The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and
D for download.
Understanding printer menus
227
Menu item
Description
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specifies the symbol set for each font name
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting.
• 12U PC‑850 is the international factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:
•
•
•
•
10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting.
• Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Sets the printer to print on A4‑size paper
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return after a
line feed control command
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed after a carriage
return control command
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
228
Menu item
Description
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray <x>
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Man Env
Off
None
0–199
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Tray Renumber
View Factory Def
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder,
even if it has not been installed
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• None is not an available selection. It appears only when it is selected by
the PCL 5 interpreter.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Understanding printer menus
229
HTML menu
Menu item
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Description
Sets the default font for HTML documents
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Notes:
Intl Univers
• The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not specify a
Joanna MT
font.
Letter Gothic
• The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card is
Lubalin Gothic
installed: HG-GothicB, MSung-Light, MD_DotumChe, and MingMTMarigold
Light.
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
Menu item
Description
Font Size
1–255 pt
Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Understanding printer menus
230
Menu item
Description
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Menu item
Description
Auto Fit
On
Off
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation
Invert
On
Off
Inverts bi‑tonal monochrome images
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape
Sets the image orientation
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Menu item
Description
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus
231
Help menu
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information about
using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all
guides to print all of them at one time.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
Menu item
Description
Print all guides
Prints all the guides
Copy guide
Provides information about making copies and changing settings
E‑mail guide
Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and changing settings
Fax guide
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and changing settings
FTP guide
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing settings
Information guide
Provides help in locating additional information
Print defects guide
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Supplies guide
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Understanding printer messages
232
Understanding printer messages
List of status and error messages
Answering
The printer is answering a fax call. Wait for the message to clear.
Busy
Wait for the message to clear.
Call complete
A fax call is completed. Wait for the message to clear.
Change <src> to <x>
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper size or type.
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the paper
loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.
Check tray <x> connection
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the tray.
Reattach the tray.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
Restart the printer.
Understanding printer messages
233
If the error occurs again:
1
2
3
4
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the tray.
Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.
Close door or insert cartridge
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers.
Close finisher side door
Close the side door on the finisher.
Connect <x>bps
The fax is connected. Wait for the message to clear.
Note: <x> is the baud rate per second.
Dialing
A fax number is dialed. If the number is too long to fit on the screen, only the word Dialing appears. Wait for the
message to clear.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard
disk must be reformatted.
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.
Disk Full ‑ Scan Job Canceled
The scan job canceled or stopped due to insufficient printer hard disk space.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax failed
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.
Understanding printer messages
234
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Name not set up
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Flushing buffer
Wait for the message to clear.
Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
• Insert a staple cartridge to clear the message.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple feature.
Understanding printer messages
Insert Tray <x>
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Install bin <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified bin.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
Install envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the envelope feeder:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the envelope feeder.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
Install Tray <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.
Invalid PIN
Enter a valid PIN.
235
Understanding printer messages
236
Job stored for delayed transmission
The scanning completed for a delayed send fax job. Wait for the message to clear.
Line busy
A fax number is dialed, but the fax line is busy. Wait for the message to clear.
Load <src> with <x>
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper type or size.
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load manual feeder with <x>
<x> is a paper type or size.
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
• Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been
restarted.
Network/Network <x>
The printer is connected to the network.
Understanding printer messages
237
Network indicates that the printer is using the standard network port built into the printer system board. Network
<x> indicates that an internal print server is installed inside the printer or that the printer is connected to an external
print server.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
The printer is not detecting an analog phone line, so the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.
No answer
A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.
No dial tone
The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.
Queued for sending
The scanning process of a fax job completed, but the job is not sent yet because another fax job is being sent or received.
Wait for the message to clear.
Ready
The printer is ready to receive print jobs.
Reattach bin <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the specified bin.
Reattach the bin.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1
2
3
4
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the specified bin.
Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.
Understanding printer messages
Reattach bin <x> – <y>
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the specified bins.
Reattach the bins.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1
2
3
4
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the specified bins.
Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins.
Reattach envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the envelope feeder.
Reattach the envelope feeder.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
Restart the printer.
If the error occurs again:
1
2
3
4
Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the envelope feeder.
Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the envelope feeder.
Receive complete
The printer has received an entire fax job. Wait for the message to clear.
238
Understanding printer messages
239
Receiving page <n>
The printer receives page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page received. Wait for the message to
clear.
Remove packaging material, check <x>
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from <linked bin set name>
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from all bins
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from bin <x>
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Replace <x> if restarting job.
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner
to restart the scan job. <x> is a page of the scan job.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the message.
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the ADF
immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately after
the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully scanned
page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP.
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters as
the previous job starts.
Understanding printer messages
240
Replace wiper
Replace the fuser wiper, or try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Touch Ignore to clear the message, but at the next power-on, the message appears again.
Restore Held Jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scanner Jam Access Cover Open
Close the bottom ADF door to clear the message.
Securely clearing disk space
The printer hard disk wiping process needs to recover. The message clears when all blocks are cleared.
Sending page <n>
The printer sends page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page sent. Wait for the message to clear.
Serial <x>
The printer is using a serial cable connection. The serial port is the active communication link.
Set clock
The clock is not set. This message appears if no other fax status message appears. It remains until the clock is set.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Understanding printer messages
241
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
System busy, preparing resources for job.
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Wait for the message to clear.
System busy, preparing resources for job. Deleting held job(s).
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Some held jobs are deleted to free system memory. Wait for the
message to clear.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported
one.
Unsupported USB device, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB device.
Unsupported USB hub, please remove
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.
USB/USB <x>
The printer is using a USB cable connection. The USB port is the active communication link.
Waiting for redial
The printer is waiting to redial the fax number. Wait for the message to clear.
30 Invalid refill, change cartridge
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
31 Replace defective cartridge
Remove the defective print cartridge, and then install a new one.
32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
Understanding printer messages
242
34 Short paper
Try one or more of the following:
•
•
•
•
Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.
Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.
Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size
and type.
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the current print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Understanding printer messages
243
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
42.xy Cartridge region mismatch
Install a print cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
1
US
2
Europe, the Middle East, and Africa
3
Asia
4
Latin America
9
Invalid region
50 PPDS font error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer will
find a similar font and reformat the affected text.
• Cancel the current print job.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Understanding printer messages
244
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Network <x> software error
<x> is the number of the network connection.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
54 Serial option <x> error
<x> is the number of the serial option.
Try one or more of the following:
• Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and host computer.
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
Understanding printer messages
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>
<x> is a slot on the printer system board.
Try one or more of the following:
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer power back on.
56 Parallel port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the parallel port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the serial port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard parallel port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
245
Understanding printer messages
246
56 USB port <x> disabled
<x> is the number of the USB port.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored
Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the
held jobs. Possible changes include:
•
•
•
•
The printer firmware has been updated.
Paper input, output, or duplex options needed for the print job were removed.
The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port.
The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
58 Too many bins attached
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional bins.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer power back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the extra disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
Understanding printer messages
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the envelope feeder.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the envelope feeder.
59 Incompatible output bin <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified output bin.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin.
59 Incompatible tray <x>
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a larger printer hard disk.
247
Understanding printer messages
248
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
80 Routine maintenance needed
The printer needs to have routine maintenance done. Order a maintenance kit, which contains all the items necessary
to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.
88 Cartridge low
The toner is low. Replace the print cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.yy Cartridge nearly low
The toner is low. Replace the print cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.yy Replace cartridge
The print cartridge is empty.
1 Replace the print cartridge.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.
200–282.yy paper jam
1 Clear the paper path.
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.
283 Staple jam
1 Clear the jam from the specified stapler area(s).
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.
290‑294.yy scanner jam
Clear all original documents from the scanner.
293 Replace all originals if restarting job.
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF. Load paper in the ADF.
Understanding printer messages
249
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears. This clears the message.
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears. This cancels the job and clears
the message.
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the ADF
immediately after the last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after the
last successfully scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully scanned
page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP.
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job. The message clears. A new scan job
containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open
Close the scanner cover.
840.01 Scanner Disabled
This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support person.
841‑846 Scanner Service Error
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check all cable connections.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
If the service message appears again, then contact Customer Support, and report the message.
900–999 Service <message>
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check all cable connections.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.
Understanding printer messages
250
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Maintaining the printer
251
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
Maintaining the printer
252
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.
5 Open the bottom ADF door.
1
2
6 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
7 Close the bottom ADF door.
8 Wipe the scanner glass (flatbed) and backing material by moving the cloth or paper towel from side to side.
9 Close the scanner cover.
Adjusting scanner registration
Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location. To manually adjust the scanner
registration:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material.
3 Hold down
2
ABC
and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power‑on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch the down arrow until Scanner Manual Registration appears.
6 Touch Scanner Manual Registration.
7 Touch Print Quick Test to print a registration page.
8 Choose the section of the scanner to align.
Maintaining the printer
253
To align the scanner glass (flatbed):
a Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass.
b Touch Copy Quick Test.
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.
c
d
e
f
Touch Flatbed.
Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings.
Touch Submit.
Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.
Repeat the flatbed alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the
original.
To align the ADF:
a Do one of the following:
• To align the ADF front: place the Quick Test page faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
• To align the ADF back: place the Quick Test page facedown, short edge first into the ADF.
b Touch Copy Quick Test.
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.
c
d
e
f
Touch ADF Front or ADF Back.
Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings.
Touch Submit.
Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.
Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original.
9 Touch Back.
10 Touch Exit Configuration.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Maintaining the printer
254
Do not expose supplies to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct sunlight
Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust
Conserving supplies
There are some settings you can change from the printer control panel that will help you conserve toner and paper.
For more information, see “Supplies menu,” “Quality menu,” and “Finishing menu.”
If you need to print several copies, you can conserve supplies by printing the first copy and checking it for accuracy
before printing the remaining copies.
Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.
Note: If Status/Supplies is not on the home screen, then print a menu settings page to review the status of the
supplies.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in
the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.
Maintaining the printer
255
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place
where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Ordering print cartridges
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded:
1 Remove the print cartridge.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.
Recommended print cartridges and part numbers
Part name
Lexmark Return Program
Cartridge
Regular cartridge
Print cartridge
X651A11A
X651A21A
High Yield Print Cartridge
X651H11A
X651H21A
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge
X654X11A
X654X21A
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications
X651H04A
Not applicable
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04A
Not applicable
For the US and Canada
For Europe, the Middle East, and Africa
Print cartridge
X651A21E
X651A11E
High Yield Print Cartridge
X651H21E
X651H11E
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge
X654X21E
X654X11E
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications
X651H04E
Not applicable
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04E
Not applicable
For the Asia Pacific Region, including Australia and New Zealand
Print cartridge
X651A21P
X651A11P
Maintaining the printer
256
Part name
Lexmark Return Program
Cartridge
Regular cartridge
High Yield Print Cartridge
X651H21P
X651H11P
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge
X654X21P
X654X11P
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications
X651H04P
Not applicable
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04P
Not applicable
For Latin America
Print cartridge
X651A21L
X651A11L
High Yield Print Cartridge
X651H21L
X651H11L
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge
X654X21L
X654X11L
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications
X651H04L
Not applicable
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label Applications X654X04L
Not applicable
Ordering a maintenance kit
When 80 Routine maintenance needed appears, order a maintenance kit. The maintenance kit contains all
the items necessary to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.
Notes:
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit. The charge roll,
fuser, pick rollers, and transfer roller can also be individually ordered and replaced as necessary.
• To check the fuser type (T1 or T2) installed in the printer, remove the print cartridge to view the label on the
fuser.
Part name
Part number
Maintenance kit
40X4723 (100 V T1 fuser)
40X4724 (110 V T1 fuser)
40X4765 (220 V T1 fuser)
40X4766 (100 V T2 fuser)
40X4767 (110 V T2 fuser)
40X4768 (220 V T2 fuser)
Ordering a fuser
To check the fuser type (T1 or T2) installed in the printer, remove the print cartridge to view the label on the fuser.
Maintaining the printer
257
Part name
Part number
T1 fuser
40X1870 (100 V)
40X4418 (110 V)
40X1871 (220 V)
T2 fuser
40X5853 (100 V)
40X5854 (110 V)
40X5855 (220 V)
Ordering an ADF maintenance kit
The ADF maintenance kit contains all the items necessary to replace the ADF pick mechanism and the ADF separator
roller.
See the following table for the maintenance kit part number for your specific printer.
Part name
Part number
ADF Maintenance kit
40X4769
Ordering a transfer roller
When toner smudges appear on the front or back of printed pages, order a replacement transfer roller.
Part name
Part number
Transfer roll assembly
40X1886
Ordering charge rolls
When toner fog or background shading appears on printed pages, order replacement charge rolls.
Part name
Part number
Charge roll assembly
40X5852
Ordering pick rollers
When the paper fails to properly feed from the tray, order new pick rollers.
Part name
Part number
Pick rollers
40X4308
Ordering ADF replacement parts
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the
automatic document feeder.
Maintaining the printer
258
Part name
Part number
ADF pick assembly
3017345
ADF separator roll
3017348
Ordering staple cartridges
When Staples Low or Staples Empty appears, order the specified staple cartridge.
For more information, see the illustrations inside the stapler door.
Part name
Part number
Staple Cartridges–3 pack
25A0013
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products to Lexmark for recycling:
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to move it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
Maintaining the printer
259
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Notes:
– Remove all printer options before moving the printer.
– Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Setting the printer up in a new location
Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer:
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
Right Side 20 cm (8 in.)
2
Left Side
31 cm (12 in.)
3
Front
51 cm (20 in.)
4
Rear
20 cm (8 in.)
5
Top
31 cm (12 in.)
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Administrative support
260
Administrative support
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking
Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark
Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:
•
•
•
•
•
Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
Checking the status of the printer supplies
Configuring printer settings
Configuring network settings
Viewing reports
To access the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Notes:
• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in
the TCP/IP section.
• For more information, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded
Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Checking the device status
Using the Embedded Web Server, you can view paper tray settings, the level of toner in the print cartridge, the
percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit, and capacity measurements of certain printer parts. To view the
device status:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
You can have the printer send you an e‑mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed,
added, or unjammed.
Administrative support
261
To set up e‑mail alerts:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type in the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: See your system support person to set up the e‑mail server.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Adjusting the brightness of the display
If you are having trouble reading your display, the LCD brightness can be adjusted through the Settings menu.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightness appears.
6 Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the brightness.
Brightness settings can be adjusted from 20–100 (100 is the factory default setting).
7 Touch Submit.
8 Touch
.
Administrative support
262
Adjusting Power Saver
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default is 30 minutes.
To increase or decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode, do one of the following:
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.
3 Click Timeouts.
4 In the Power Saver box, increase or decrease the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters
Power Saver mode.
5 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6 Touch Timeouts.
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Power Saver Mode to decrease or increase the time the printer waits
before entering Power Saver mode.
The settings available range from 1–240 minutes.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Restoring the factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before you restore
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 45.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
setting. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and Network/Port menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
3 Touch Settings.
.
Administrative support
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaults appears.
6 Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Now appears.
7 Touch Submit.
8 Touch
.
263
Troubleshooting
264
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
•
•
•
•
•
•
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDFs do not print
The documents contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon.
The Print dialog appears.
3 Select Print as image.
4 Click OK.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices, visit
the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting
265
Jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer
software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check the
network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make
sure the network is functioning correctly.
Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGES PRINT
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
Troubleshooting
266
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Job takes longer than expected to print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6 Touch Print Recovery.
7 Touch the right arrow next to Page Protect until Off appears.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN HEX TRACE MODE
If Ready Hex appears on the display, then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the
printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
Troubleshooting
267
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeouts appears.
6 Touch Timeouts.
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
Troubleshooting
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Blank pages
Checkerboard pattern
Distorted graphics or pictures
Missing characters
Faded print
Dark print
Skewed lines
Smudges
Streaks
Unexpected characters
White lines in print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
268
Troubleshooting
269
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on page 251.
THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK
Adjust the density of the copy.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND
• Increase the background removal setting.
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
PATTERNS (MOIRÉ) APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT
• On the Copy screen, select the Text/Photo or Printed Image icon.
• Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.
• On the Copy screen, adjust the scale setting.
TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING
•
•
•
•
On the Copy screen, touch the Text icon.
Decrease the background removal setting.
Increase the contrast setting.
Decrease the shadow detail setting.
THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED
• On the Copy screen, select the Printed Image icon.
• Decrease the background removal setting.
Troubleshooting
270
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
• The printer is turned on.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
•
•
•
•
The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Troubleshooting
271
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on page 251.
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Troubleshooting
272
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Troubleshooting
273
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
Troubleshooting
274
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.
6 Click Submit.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
Troubleshooting
275
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
RE‑SEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
6 Click Submit.
Troubleshooting
276
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the option instruction sheet.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option. For more information, see “Updating available options
in the printer driver” on page 47.
Paper trays
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
Troubleshooting
277
2000‑sheet tray
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE ELEVATOR TRAY IS NOT WORKING PROPERLY
• Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000‑sheet tray.
• Make sure the printer is turned on.
THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS DO NOT TURN TO ADVANCE PAPER
• Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000‑sheet tray.
• Make sure the printer is turned on.
Envelope feeder
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
MAKE SURE THE ENVELOPES ARE LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are using.
2 For more information, see “Loading the envelope feeder” on page 81.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and paper size settings match the envelopes you are using:
1 From the printer control panel, check the settings for the envelope feeder from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct settings from the computer:
• For Windows users, specify the settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the settings from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE ENVELOPE FEEDER IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the envelope feeder is listed on the menu settings page, but an envelope jams when it enters or exits the feeder,
then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the envelope feeder. For more information, see the hardware setup
documentation that came with the envelope feeder, or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the envelope
feeder instruction sheet.
Output options
If the high capacity output expander, 4‑bin mailbox, or StapleSmart finisher is listed on the menu settings page, but
paper jams when it exits the printer or enters the output option, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the
option. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option.
Troubleshooting
278
Flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Hard disk with adapter
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Internal Solutions Port
If the Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) does not operate correctly, then these are possible solutions. Try one or
more of the following:
CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board.
• Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information about installing software for network printing, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the
multipurpose feeder.
Troubleshooting
279
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:
1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 On the home screen, touch
.
3 Touch Settings.
4 Touch General Settings.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recovery appears.
6 Touch Print Recovery.
7 Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
8 Touch Submit.
9 Touch
.
Solving print quality problems
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not
correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.
Isolating print quality problems
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Load Letter‑ or A4‑size paper in the tray.
3 Hold down
2
ABC
and
6
MNO
while turning the printer on.
Troubleshooting
280
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power‑on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pages appears.
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
7 Touch Back.
8 Touch Exit Configuration.
Blank pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the print cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the print cartridge.
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears, order a new print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS
• Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi, 1200 Image Q, 1200 dpi, or 2400 Image Q.
• Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu.
Troubleshooting
281
MAKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED
If you are using downloaded fonts, then verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and
the software program.
Clipped images
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Ghost images
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting
Gray background
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
• From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
Incorrect margins
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
282
Troubleshooting
Paper curl
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
283
Troubleshooting
THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.
THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.
Repeating defects
REPEATING MARKS OCCUR EVENLY DOWN THE PAGE
Replace the charge rolls if the defects occur every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.).
Replace the transfer roller if the defects occur every 51.7 mm (2.04 in.).
Replace the print cartridge if the defects occur every:
• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
Replace the fuser if the defects occur every:
• 88.0 mm (3.46 in.)
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
284
Troubleshooting
Solid black or white streaks
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, then choose a different fill pattern from your software program or application.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
• Try a different type of paper.
• Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.
• Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Texture settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder.
MAKE SURE THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY IN THE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one.
Print is too light
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the Brightness setting is too light, or the Contrast setting is too low.
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
285
Troubleshooting
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
THE TONER IS LOW
When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new print cartridge.
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
Print is too dark
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the Brightness setting is too dark, or the Contrast setting is too high.
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
286
Troubleshooting
287
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
Solid color pages
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For
more information, contact Customer Support.
Troubleshooting
Streaked vertical lines
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:
• From the printer control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper Menu.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR
Check the paper path around the print cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
THE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the charge rolls.
288
Troubleshooting
289
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Toner rubs off
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray.
Toner specks
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.
Troubleshooting
290
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Embedded Web Server does not open
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https:// instead of http:// before the printer IP
address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.
Contacting Customer Support
When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call (1‑800‑539‑6275). For other countries/regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com.
Notices
291
Notices
Product name:
Lexmark X651de, Lexmark X652de, Lexmark X654de, Lexmark X656de, Lexmark X656dte, Lexmark X658d, Lexmark
X658de, Lexmark X658dme, Lexmark X658dfe, Lexmark X658dte, Lexmark X658dtme, Lexmark X658dtfe
Machine type:
7462
Model(s):
0A1, 0A5, 2A1, 2A2, 2A5, 2A6, 4A2, 4A6, 031, 035, 231, 232, 235, 236, 432, 436
Edition notice
March 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:
Lexmark International, Inc.
Bldg 004-2/CSC
740 New Circle Road NW
Lexington, KY 40550
© 2008 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer
software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.
Notices
292
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
MarkTrack, PrintCryption, and StapleSmart are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus
The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery
Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial
The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago
Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile
Nebiolo
Geneva
Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans
The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman
International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa
International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery
International Typeface Corporation
Joanna
The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold
Arthur Baker
Monaco
Apple Computer, Inc.
New York
Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford
Arthur Baker
Palatino
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy
Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman
The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Notices
293
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Compliance statement
This product complies with the Class A emission requirements of EN55022 and immunity requirements of EN55024.
This product is not intended to be used in residential environments.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The following notice is applicable if your printer has a wireless network card installed.
The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. A minimum separation
of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure
requirements of the FCC.
Notices
294
Industry Canada notices
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Industry Canada radio interference statement
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Notices
295
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Radio interference notice
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case, the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and
Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France.
This product satisfies the limits of EN 55022; safety requirements of EN 60950; radio spectrum requirements of ETSI
EN 300 330-1 and ETSI EN 300 330-2; and the EMC requirements of EN 55024, ETSI EN 301 489-1 and ETSI EN 301 489-3.
Česky
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Notices
296
Magyar
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português
A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
India emissions notice
This device uses very low power low range RF communication that has been tested and found not to cause any
interference whatsoever. The manufacturer is not responsible in case of any disputes arising out of requirement of
permissions from any local authority, regulatory bodies or any organization, required by the end-user to install and
operate this product at his premises.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Notices
297
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing
56 dBA
Scanning
52 dBA
Copying
56 dBA
Ready
30 dBA
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Temperature information
Ambient temperature
15.6C° – 32.2C°
Shipping and storage temperature
‑40.0C° – 60.0C°
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the
Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
Notices
298
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
Notices
299
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Notices
300
South Africa telecommunications notice
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
ENERGY STAR
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser
products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 5 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 770-795 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Notices
301
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode
Description
Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing
The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.
700 W
Copying
The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
765 W
Scanning
The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.
165 W
Ready
The product is waiting for a print job.
95 W
Power Saver
The product is in energy‑saving mode.
21W, 24W, 26W
High Off
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned N/A
off.
Low Off (<1 W Off) The product is plugged into a wall outlet, the power switch is turned off, N/A
and the product is in the lowest possible power consumption mode.
Off
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned 110V = 0.15W, 220V = 1.25W
off.
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Power Saver
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the
EPA Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of
inactivity. The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time,
called the Power Saver Timeout.
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes):
110V = 45 minutes, 220V = 60 minutes
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes.
Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of
the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Notices
302
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Statement of Limited Warranty
Lexmark X651de, Lexmark X652de, Lexmark X654de, Lexmark X656de, Lexmark X656dte, Lexmark X658d, Lexmark
X658de, Lexmark X658dme, Lexmark X658dfe, Lexmark X658dte, Lexmark X658dtme, Lexmark X658dtfe
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
Notices
303
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Notices
304
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: This License Agreement (“Software License Agreement”) is a
legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. (“Lexmark”) that,
to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license
agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided
by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product. The term “Software Program” includes machine-readable
instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and recordings), and associated media, printed materials and
electronic documentation, whether incorporated into, distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.
BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED
WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED
WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE
AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE
USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.
1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact disk)
on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal
use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the Software
Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media
purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the Software
Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.
2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE
SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM. TO THE
EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRATIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH
WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.
This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time to
time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified.
If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those
provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement
of the price paid for the Software Program.
The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted
and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible
Notices
305
in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software applications and/or
internet web pages.
3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF
LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID
FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR SOLE
REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO
RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED
OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS
OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA
OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY
ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM, OR
OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENCE AGREEMENT), REGARDLESS OF
THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS, AFFILIATES, OR
REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED
ON A THIRD-PARTY CLAIM, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights
that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the
exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this
Software License Agreement:
a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term “Use” means storing, loading, installing,
executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for
concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with
Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer.
You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has the effect of
overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance of any
trademark, trade name, trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens
normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or
installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program’s proprietary notices. You may not
copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.
c Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark
International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this Software
License Agreement.
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement, all or any portion of
the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties (“Freeware”) is
licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such
Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the
time of download or installation. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and
conditions of such license.
6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software
components, media, printed materials, and this Software License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the
Software Program or components thereof. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment.
Prior to the transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these Software
License Agreement terms. Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You
Notices
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
306
may not rent, sublicense, or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this Software License
Agreement.
UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original Software
Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original
Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse
compile or otherwise translate the Software Program or assist or otherwise facilitate others to do so, except as and
to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability, error correction,
and security testing. If you have such statutory rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse
engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse compilation. You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary
for the legitimate Use of the Software Program.
ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This Software License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original
Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement.
TERM. This Software License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate
this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications,
documentation, and merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your
license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this Software License Agreement. Upon such
termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications,
documentation, and merged portions in any form.
TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and
services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Software License Agreement or your Use of the Software
Program.
LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Software License Agreement may be
brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under applicable
law.
APPLICABLE LAW. This Software License Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky,
United States of America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at private
expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program are as set forth in this Software
License Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any equivalent agency
regulation or contract clause).
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information you
provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you.
Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary
to provide such services.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software
Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software
Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical,
or biological weapons proliferation.
AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this Software License Agreement
electronically. This means that when you click the “Agree” or “I accept” button on this page or use this product,
you acknowledge your agreement to these Software License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are
doing so with the intent to “sign” a contract with Lexmark.
CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you
sign this Software License Agreement and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to
enter into this contract.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Software License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this Software
License Agreement that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark
Notices
307
relating to the Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and conditions supersede
all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and representations with respect to the
Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this Software License Agreement (except to the extent
such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this Software License Agreement, any other written
agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program). To the extent any Lexmark
policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this Software License Agreement, the terms of
this Software License Agreement shall control.
Index
308
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 250
2000‑sheet tray
loading 75
200–282.yy paper jam 248
250‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 72
283 Staple jam 248
290‑294.yy scanner jam 248
293 Replace all originals if restarting
job 248
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 249
30 Invalid refill, change
cartridge 241
31 Replace defective cartridge 241
32 Cartridge part number
unsupported by device 241
34 Short paper 242
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 242
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 242
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 242
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 242
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 242
38 Memory full 243
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 243
42.xy Cartridge region
mismatch 243
50 PPDS font error 243
51 Defective flash detected 243
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 244
53 Unformatted flash detected 244
54 Network <x> software error 244
54 Serial option <x> error 244
54 Standard network software
error 244
55 Unsupported option in slot 245
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 72
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 245
56 Serial port <x> disabled 245
56 Standard parallel port
disabled 245
56 Standard USB port disabled 245
56 USB port <x> disabled 246
57 Configuration change, held jobs
were not restored 246
58 Too many bins attached 246
58 Too many disks installed 246
58 Too many flash options
installed 246
58 Too many trays attached 247
59 Incompatible envelope
feeder 247
59 Incompatible output bin
<x> 247
59 Incompatible tray <x> 247
61 Remove defective disk 247
62 Disk full 247
63 Unformatted disk 248
80 Routine maintenance
needed 248
841‑846 Scanner Service Error 249
88 Cartridge low 248
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 248
88.yy Replace cartridge 248
900–999 Service <message> 249
Symbols
“scan to computer” screen
options 128, 129, 130
A
Active NIC menu 167
address book, fax
using 115
ADF
copying using 93
ADF maintenance kit
ordering 257
ADF pick assembly
ordering 257
ADF separator roll
ordering 257
Answering 232
AppleTalk menu 173
attaching cables 44
B
Bin Setup menu 164
brightness, adjusting 261
Busy 232
buttons, home screen 19
buttons, printer control panel 18
buttons, touch screen 21
C
cables
Ethernet 44
USB 44
Call complete 232
calling Customer Support 290
canceling a job
from Macintosh 138
from the printer control
panel 137
from Windows 138
card stock
loading 79
tips on using 133
Change <src> to <x> 232
charge rolls
ordering 257
Check tray <x> connection 232
checking an unresponsive
printer 264
checking an unresponsive
scanner 270
checking device status
on Embedded Web Server 260
cleaning
exterior of the printer 251
scanner glass 251
Close door or insert cartridge 233
Close finisher side door 233
collating copies 98
Confidential print jobs 134
printing from Macintosh
computer 135
printing from Windows 135
Confidential Print menu 181
Index
configuration information
wireless network 48
configurations
printer 15
Configure MP menu 156
configuring
port settings 56
configuring the e‑mail settings 107
Connect <x>bps 233
connecting fax
using RJ11 adapter 61
connecting the printer to
answering machine 66
computer modem 68
telephone 65
telephone wall jack in
Germany 64
conserving supplies 254
contacting Customer Support 290
control panel, printer 18
copy quality
adjusting 98
improving 105
copy screen
options 102, 103, 104
Copy Settings menu 192
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 268
partial document or photo
copies 270
poor copy quality 268
poor scanned image quality 271
scanner unit does not close 268
copying
adding a date and time stamp 101
adding an overlay message 101
adjusting quality 98
canceling a copy job 102
collating copies 98
custom job (job build) 100
document containing mixed paper
sizes 96
enlarging 97
from one size to another 95
improving copy quality 105
making transparencies 94
multiple pages on one sheet 99
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 97
photos 94
placing separator sheets between
copies 99
309
quick copy 93
reducing 97
selecting a tray 96
to letterhead 95
using the ADF 93
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 94
Custom Bin Names menu 163
Custom Names menu 162
custom paper type
assigning 84
Custom Scan Sizes menu 163
Custom Type <x>
changing name 84
Custom Types menu 162
D
date and time
setting 70
Default Source menu 153
Dialing 233
directory list, printing 137
Disk corrupted 233
Disk Full ‑ Scan Job Canceled 233
Disk Wiping menu 182
display troubleshooting
display is blank 264
display shows only diamonds 264
display, printer control panel 18
adjusting brightness 261
documents, printing
from Macintosh 131
from Windows 131
duplexing 97
E
Embedded Web Server 260
administrator settings 260
checking device status 260
does not open 290
networking settings 260
setting up e‑mail alerts 260
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide 260
emission
notices 293, 294, 295, 296
enlarging a copy 97
Envelope Enhance 157
envelopes
loading 79, 81
tips on using 132
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 53
Windows 53
Ethernet port 44
exterior of the printer
cleaning 251
e‑mail
canceling 110
notice of low supply level 260
notice of paper jam 260
notice of paper needed 260
notice that different paper is
needed 260
e‑mail function
setting up 106
e‑mail screen
advanced options 111
options 110, 111
E‑mail Settings menu 206
e‑mailing
adding message line 109
adding subject line 109
changing output file type 109
configuring the e‑mail
settings 107
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 107
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 107
setting up e‑mail function 106
using shortcut numbers 108
using the address book 108
using the touch screen 108
F
factory defaults, restoring
printer control panel menus 262
fax card
installing 42
Fax failed 233
Fax memory full 234
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 197
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 205
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 234
fax quality, improving 120
fax screen
advanced options 119
options 118, 119
Index
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 234
Fax Station Name not set up 234
Fax Station Number not set up 234
fax troubleshooting
blocking junk faxes 117
caller ID is not shown 272
can receive but not send
faxes 274
can send but not receive
faxes 274
cannot send or receive a fax 272
received fax has poor print
quality 275
faxing
canceling a fax job 118
changing resolution 116
choosing a fax connection 60
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 114
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 115
forwarding faxes 121
holding faxes 120
improving fax quality 120
making a fax lighter or darker 116
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 117
sending using the computer 114
sending using the printer control
panel 113
setting the date and time 70
setting the outgoing fax name and
number 69
turning Daylight Saving Time
on 70
using shortcuts 115
using the address book 115
viewing a fax log 117
FCC notices 293, 297
fiber optic
network setup 53
finding information
customer support 14
publications 14
Finishing menu 221
firmware card
installing 29
flash drive 136
Flash Drive menu 214
flash memory card
installing 29
310
troubleshooting 278
Flushing buffer 234
forwarding faxes 121
FTP
address book 123
FTP quality, improving 126
FTP screen
advanced options 125
options 124, 125
FTP Settings menu 211
fuser
ordering 256
G
guidelines
card stock 133
envelopes 132
labels 133
letterhead 131
transparencies 132
H
hard disk with adapter
troubleshooting 278
held jobs 134
printing from Macintosh
computer 135
printing from Windows 135
Help menu 231
holding faxes 120
home screen
buttons 19
HTML menu 229
I
Image menu 230
Insert staple cartridge 234
Insert Tray <x> 235
Install bin <x> 235
Install envelope feeder 235
Install tray <x> 235
installation
wireless network 49, 50
installing
options in driver 47
printer software 46
installing printer software
adding options 47
Internal Solutions Port
installing 32
troubleshooting 278
Internal Solutions Port, network
changing port settings 56
Invalid PIN 235
IPv6 menu 172
J
jams
avoiding 140
locating doors and trays 141
locations 141
numbers 141
jams, clearing
200 141
201 141
202 143
230–239 144
240–249 145
250 146
260 147
270–279 147
280–289 paper jams 147
283 staple jams 148
290–294 150
stapler 148
job interrupt 101
Job stored for delayed
transmission 236
L
labels
tips on using 133
letterhead
copying to 95
loading, 2000‑sheet tray 75
loading, multipurpose feeder 79
loading, trays 72
tips on using 131
LexLink menu 174
light, indicator 18
Line busy 236
linking trays 83
Load <src> with <x> 236
Load manual feeder with <x> 236
Load staples 236
loading
2000‑sheet tray 75
250‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 72
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 72
card stock 79
Index
envelopes 79, 81
letterhead in 2000‑sheet tray 75
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 79
letterhead in trays 72
multipurpose feeder 79
transparencies 79
M
Macintosh
wireless network installation 50
maintenance kit
ordering 256
memory card
installing 28
troubleshooting 278
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 236
menu settings page
printing 45
menus
Active NIC 167
AppleTalk 173
Bin Setup 164
Confidential Print 181
Configure MP 156
Copy Settings 192
Custom Bin Names 163
Custom Names 162
Custom Scan Sizes 163
Custom Types 162
Default Source 153
diagram of 152
Disk Wiping 182
Envelope Enhance 157
E‑mail Settings 206
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 197
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 205
Finishing 221
Flash Drive 214
FTP Settings 211
Help 231
HTML 229
Image 230
IPv6 172
LexLink 174
Miscellaneous 181
NetWare 173
Network <x> 167
Network Card 170
Network Reports 170
Paper Loading 161
311
Paper Size/Type 153
Paper Texture 157
Paper Weight 159
Parallel <x> menu 176
PCL Emul 226
PDF 225
PostScript 226
Quality 223
Reports 165
Security Audit Log 183
Serial <x> 178
Set Date/Time 184
Settings 185
Setup 219
SMTP Setup menu 169
Standard Network 167
Standard USB 175
Substitute Size 157
TCP/IP 171
Universal Setup 163
Utilities 224
Wireless 172
XPS 230
Miscellaneous menu 181
moving the printer 258, 259
multiple pages on one sheet 99
multipurpose feeder
loading 79
N
NetWare menu 173
Network 236
Network <x> 236
Network <x> menu 167
Network Card menu 170
Network Reports menu 170
network setup page 46
Networking Guide 260
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 237
No answer 237
No dial tone 237
noise emission levels 296
notices 292, 293, 294, 295, 296,
297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302
O
options
fax card 25, 42
firmware card 29
firmware cards 25
flash memory card 29
internal 25
Internal Solutions Port 32
memory card 28
memory cards 25
networking 25
ports 25
printer hard disk 38
options, touch‑screen
copy 102, 103, 104
e‑mail 110, 111
fax 118, 119
FTP 124, 125
scan to computer 128, 129, 130
ordering
ADF maintenance kit 257
ADF pick assembly 257
ADF separator roll 257
charge rolls 257
fuser 256
maintenance kit 256
pick rollers 257
staple cartridges 258
transfer roller 257
ordering supplies 255
output file type
changing 109
P
paper
characteristics 86
letterhead 87
preprinted forms 87
recycled 88
selecting 87
selecting weight 159
setting size 71
setting type 71
storing 88
unacceptable 87
Universal Paper Size 163
Universal size setting 71
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 279
paper jams
avoiding 140
Paper Loading menu 161
Paper Size/Type menu 153
paper sizes
supported by the printer 89
Paper Texture menu 157
Index
paper type
custom 84
paper types
duplex support 90
supported by finisher 91
supported by printer 90
where to load 90
Paper Weight menu 159
paper weights
supported by finisher 91
Parallel <x> menu 176
PCL Emul menu 226
PDF menu 225
photos
copying 94
pick rollers
ordering 257
port settings
configuring 56
PostScript menu 226
Power Saver
adjusting 262
print job
canceling from Macintosh 138
canceling from Windows 138
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 251
print quality test pages,
printing 137
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 280
characters have jagged edges 280
clipped images 281
ghost images 281
gray background 282
poor transparency quality 290
print irregularities 283
print is too dark 286
print is too light 285
print quality test pages 279
repeating defects 284
skewed print 284
solid black streaks 285
solid color pages 287
solid white streaks 285
streaked vertical lines 288
toner fog or background
shading 288
toner rubs off 289
toner specks 289
print troubleshooting
error reading USB drive 264
312
held jobs do not print 265
incorrect characters print 266
incorrect margins 282
jammed page does not
reprint 279
job prints from wrong tray 266
job prints on wrong paper 266
job takes longer than
expected 266
jobs do not print 265
Large jobs do not collate 267
multiple‑language PDFs do not
print 264
paper curl 283
paper frequently jams 278
tray linking does not work 267
unexpected page breaks
occur 267
printer
configurations 15
minimum clearances 16, 259
models 15
moving 258, 259
selecting a location 16
setting up in new location 259
shipping 259
printer control panel 18
factory defaults, restoring 262
printer hard disk
installing 38
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 250
200–282.yy paper jam 248
283 Staple jam 248
290‑294.yy scanner jam 248
293 Replace all originals if
restarting job 248
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 249
30 Invalid refill, change
cartridge 241
31 Replace defective
cartridge 241
32 Cartridge part number
unsupported by device 241
34 Short paper 242
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 242
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 242
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 242
37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 242
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 242
38 Memory full 243
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 243
42.xy Cartridge region
mismatch 243
50 PPDS font error 243
51 Defective flash detected 243
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 244
53 Unformatted flash
detected 244
54 Network <x> software
error 244
54 Serial option <x> error 244
54 Standard network software
error 244
55 Unsupported option in
slot 245
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 245
56 Serial port <x> disabled 245
56 Standard parallel port
disabled 245
56 Standard USB port
disabled 245
56 USB port <x> disabled 246
57 Configuration change, held jobs
were not restored 246
58 Too many bins attached 246
58 Too many disks installed 246
58 Too many flash options
installed 246
58 Too many trays attached 247
59 Incompatible envelope
feeder 247
59 Incompatible output bin
<x> 247
59 Incompatible tray <x> 247
61 Remove defective disk 247
62 Disk full 247
63 Unformatted disk 248
80 Routine maintenance
needed 248
841‑846 Scanner Service
Error 249
88 Cartridge low 248
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 248
Index
88.yy Replace cartridge 248
900–999 Service <message> 249
Answering 232
Busy 232
Call complete 232
Change <src> to <x> 232
Check tray <x> connection 232
Close door or insert cartridge 233
Close finisher side door 233
Connect <x>bps 233
Dialing 233
Disk corrupted 233
Disk Full ‑ Scan Job Canceled 233
Fax failed 233
Fax memory full 234
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 234
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 234
Fax Station Name not set up 234
Fax Station Number not set
up 234
Flushing buffer 234
Insert staple cartridge 234
Insert Tray <x> 235
Install bin <x> 235
Install envelope feeder 235
Install tray <x> 235
Invalid PIN 235
Job stored for delayed
transmission 236
Line busy 236
Load <src>with <x> 236
Load manual feeder with <x> 236
Load staples 236
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 236
Network 236
Network <x> 236
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 237
No answer 237
No dial tone 237
Queued for sending 237
Ready 237
Reattach bin <x> 237
Reattach bin <x> – <y> 238
Reattach envelope feeder 238
Receive complete 238
Receiving page <n> 239
313
Remove packaging material, check
<x> 239
Remove paper from <linked bin
set name> 239
Remove paper from all bins 239
Remove paper from bin <x> 239
Remove paper from standard
output bin 239
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 239
Replace wiper 240
Restore Held Jobs? 240
Scan Document Too Long 240
Scanner ADF Cover Open 240
Scanner Disabled 249
Scanner Jam Access Cover
Open 240
Securely clearing disk space 240
Sending page <n> 240
Serial <x> 240
Set clock 240
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 240
Some held jobs were not
restored 241
System busy, preparing resources
for job. 241
System busy, preparing resources
for job. Deleting held job(s). 241
Unsupported disk 241
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 241
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 241
USB/USB <x> 241
Waiting for redial 241
printer options troubleshooting
2000‑sheet tray 277
4‑bin mailbox 277
envelope feeder 277
flash memory card 278
hard disk with adapter 278
high capacity output
expander 277
Internal Solutions Port 278
memory card 278
option not working 276
paper trays 276
StapleSmart finisher 277
printer problems, solving basic 264
printing
directory list 137
from flash drive 136
from Macintosh 131
from Windows 131
installing printer software 46
menu settings page 45
network setup page 46
print quality test pages 137
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from Macintosh computer 135
from Windows 135
Q
Quality menu 223
Queued for sending 237
R
Ready 237
Reattach bin <x> 237
Reattach bin <x> – <y> 238
Reattach envelope feeder 238
Receive complete 238
Receiving page <n> 239
recycled paper
using 88
recycling
Lexmark products 258
WEEE statement 297
reducing a copy 97
Remove packaging material, check
<x> 239
Remove paper from <linked bin set
name> 239
Remove paper from all bins 239
Remove paper from bin <x> 239
Remove paper from standard
output bin 239
Repeat print jobs 134
printing from Macintosh
computer 135
printing from Windows 135
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 239
Replace wiper 240
reports
viewing 261
Reports menu 165
Reserve print jobs 134
printing from Macintosh
computer 135
printing from Windows 135
Index
resolution, fax
changing 116
Restore Held Jobs? 240
RJ11 adapter, using 61
S
safety information 12, 13
Scan Document Too Long 240
scan quality, improving 130
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 272
partial document or photo
scans 271
scan was not successful 270
scanner unit does not close 268
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 271
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 17
functions 16
registration 252
scanner glass 17
Scanner ADF Cover Open 240
Scanner Disabled 249
scanner glass
cleaning 251
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 94
Scanner Jam Access Cover
Open 240
scanning to a computer 127
improving scan quality 130
scanning to a flash drive 128
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 123
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 124
improving FTP quality 126
using shortcut numbers 123
using the address book 123
using the keypad 122
Securely clearing disk space 240
Security Audit Log menu 183
Sending page <n> 240
Serial <x> 240
Serial <x> menu 178
serial port 58
serial printing
setting up 58
Set clock 240
314
Set Date/Time menu 184
setting
paper size 71
paper type 71
TCP/IP address 171
Universal Paper Size 71
setting up
serial printing 58
setting up the printer
on a wired network
(Macintosh) 53
on a wired network (Windows) 53
Settings menu 185
Setup menu 219
shipping the printer 259
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 107
fax destination 114, 115
FTP destination 123, 124
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 240
SMTP Setup menu 169
Some held jobs were not
restored 241
Standard Network menu 167
standard tray
loading 72
Standard USB menu 175
staple cartridges
ordering 258
status of supplies, checking 254
storing
paper 88
supplies 253
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 109
Substitute Size menu 157
supplies
conserving 254
status of 254
storing 253
supplies, ordering 255
ADF maintenance kit 257
ADF pick assembly 257
ADF separator roll 257
charge rolls 257
fuser 256
maintenance kit 256
pick rollers 257
staple cartridges 258
transfer roller 257
system board
accessing 26
System busy, preparing resources
for job. 241
System busy, preparing resources
for job. Deleting held job(s). 241
T
TCP/IP menu 171
telecommunication
notices 297, 298, 299, 300
touch screen
buttons 21
transfer roller
ordering 257
transparencies
loading 79
making 94
tips on using 132
tray linking 84
tray unlinking 84
trays
linking 83, 84
unlinking 83, 84
troubleshooting
checking an unresponsive
printer 264
checking an unresponsive
scanner 270
contacting Customer Support 290
solving basic printer
problems 264
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 268
partial document or photo
copies 270
poor copy quality 268
poor scanned image quality 271
scanner unit does not close 268
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 264
display shows only diamonds 264
troubleshooting, fax
blocking junk faxes 117
caller ID is not shown 272
can receive but not send
faxes 274
can send but not receive
faxes 274
cannot send or receive a fax 272
received fax has poor print
quality 275
Index
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 279
troubleshooting, print
error reading USB drive 264
held jobs do not print 265
incorrect characters print 266
incorrect margins 282
jammed page does not
reprint 279
job prints from wrong tray 266
job prints on wrong paper 266
job takes longer than
expected 266
jobs do not print 265
Large jobs do not collate 267
multiple‑language PDFs do not
print 264
paper curl 283
paper frequently jams 278
tray linking does not work 267
unexpected page breaks
occur 267
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 280
characters have jagged edges 280
clipped images 281
ghost images 281
gray background 282
poor transparency quality 290
print irregularities 283
print is too dark 286
print is too light 285
print quality test pages 279
repeating defects 284
skewed print 284
solid black streaks 285
solid color pages 287
solid white streaks 285
streaked vertical lines 288
toner fog or background
shading 288
toner rubs off 289
toner specks 289
troubleshooting, printer options
2000‑sheet tray 277
4‑bin mailbox 277
envelope feeder 277
flash memory card 278
hard disk with adapter 278
high capacity output
expander 277
315
Internal Solutions Port 278
memory card 278
option not working 276
paper trays 276
StapleSmart finisher 277
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 272
partial document or photo
scans 271
scan was not successful 270
scanner unit does not close 268
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 271
U
Universal Paper Size
setting 71
Universal Setup menu 163
unlinking trays 83
Unsupported disk 241
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 241
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 241
USB port 44
USB/USB <x> 241
using RJ11 adapter 61
Utilities menu 224
V
Verify print jobs 134
printing from Macintosh
computer 135
printing from Windows 135
viewing
reports 261
W
Waiting for redial 241
Windows
wireless network installation 49
wired network setup
using Windows 53
wired networking
using Macintosh 53
Wireless menu 172
wireless network
configuration information 48
installation, using Macintosh 50
installation, using Windows 49
X
XPS menu 230